Siemens SIMODRIVE 611-D Installation Instructions Manual Download | Manualshive

Page: 179 / 1154

background image

09.95



Siemens AG 2001

All Rights Reserved

6FC5197–

j

AA50

5–51

SINUMERIK 840C (IA)

5.10

Configuring the MDD

5.10.1

Description

The MDD is configured with the list module (as from SW4). The texts in the
screens can be edited.

The data that are to be displayed in the screens have been configured.

As from SW 5, it is possible to print out the list module.

Introduction

The list module is configured by means of 3 ASCII lists:

Data lists

For each list display, there is a data list in which the

S

display title

S

column width

S

data to be displayed

are described.

Text lists

The text lists are organized language specifically. They contain one text for each
data and additional texts for headings, units etc.

Semantics list

For each item of data, this contains information on

S

internal format

S

display format

S

input limits

S

special treatment

Separate text and semantics lists exist for each machine data area (e.g. NC MD).

Help texts/info lists

The info lists are organized language specifically. They contain one text for each
data which can consist of several lines.

Explanation

The list module looks in these lists for all information regarding display structure and
the data to be displayed and stores them in a compressed file (binary file). If this file
already exists it is accessed as soon as the list display is called up,
i.e., the ASCII lists are not used.

The list module first looks for the data lists in the user path. If it does not find
them here, it uses the data lists in the Siemens path.

If the data list exists in the user area the text and semantics lists are taken from
the user AND Siemens area.

If the data list only exists in the Siemens area the text and semantic lists are only
taken from the Siemens area.

If the keyswitch is in position 3, only the lists in the Siemens path are used. If
the password is not set the keyswitch is re-evaluated every time a display is
selected. The keyswitch position is ignored with “Set password”.

If you wish to display other data or use other texts or input limits, you can copy
the data lists from the Siemens path into the user path and edit them as
necessary.

5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3)

5.10 Configuring the MDD

«
...
177
178
179
180
181
...
»

Summary of Contents for SIMODRIVE 611-D

Page 1: ...SINUMERIK 840C SIMODRIVE 611 D Installation Guide 09 2001 Edition Installation Instructions Service Documentation ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...ODRIVE 611 D Installation Instructions Installation Guide SINUMERIK 840C CE Control Standard Export Version SIMODRIVE 611 D Drive Software Version Software Version 1 x 2 x 3 x 1 x 4 x 2 x 5 x 3 x 6 x 4 x 09 2001 Edition ...

Page 4: ... without express written authority Offenders will be liable for damages All rights including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design are reserved Siemens AG 1993 2001 All Rights Reserved Order No 6FC5197 6AA50 0BP2 Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany This manual is included in the documentation available on CD ROM DOCONCD Edition Order No Remarks 10 01 6F...

Page 5: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 6: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a WARNING This warning notice means that loss of life severe personal injury or substantial material damage can result if the appropriate precautions are not taken a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 7: ...a Dialog MDD as from SW 3 5 NC Machine Data NC MD NC Setting Data NC SD 6 Drive Machine Data SIMODRIVE Drive MD 7 PLC Machine Data PLC MD 8 Drive Servo Start Up Application as from SW 3 9 Axis and Spindle Installation 10 Data Backup CPU Replacement 11 Functional Descriptions 12 MMC Area Diagnosis 4 Index 13 ...

Page 8: ... 2 1 2 2 Standard installation and start up as flowchart as from SW 3 2 2 2 3 Select general reset mode as from SW 3 2 3 2 4 General reset as from SW 3 2 4 2 5 Memory configuration as from SW 3 2 6 2 6 Loading machine data as from SW 3 2 8 2 7 Deselect general reset mode 2 10 2 8 Standard installation short version up to SW 2 2 11 2 9 General reset up to SW 2 2 13 2 10 Standard installation and st...

Page 9: ... 4 6FC5 103 0AB 2 0AA0 4 38 4 4 4 2 New 19 operator panel as from SW 4 5 5 6FC5 103 0AB AA1 4 41 4 4 4 3 Defining individual color tables as from SW 5 4 4 43 4 4 5 Color mapping lists 4 44 4 4 6 Color settings for monochrome display 4 47 4 4 6 1 10 monochrome display up to SW 4 4 6FC5 103 0AB 2 0AA0 4 47 4 4 6 2 9 5 monochrome display as from SW 4 5 4 47 4 4 7 Cycles 4 48 4 5 Activating options as...

Page 10: ...ng a 1 axis FDD module with a 2 axis FDD module as from SW 3 5 45 5 9 4 Replacing a 2 axis FDD module 9 18 A with a 2 axis FDD module 18 36 A as from SW 3 5 46 5 9 5 Drive active or passive as from SW 3 5 47 5 9 6 Using a new motor type as from SW 3 5 48 5 9 7 Reinstallation of existing and new drive components using the existing drive files TEA3 5 49 5 9 8 Additional information when altering the...

Page 11: ...D 7 167 7 4 3 Diagnosis service MD data description as from SW 3 7 168 7 5 Safety Integrated SI data 7 177 8 PLC Machine Data PLC MD 8 1 8 1 General 8 1 8 1 1 Entering PLC MD up to SW 2 8 1 8 1 2 Breakdown of the PLC MD 8 2 8 2 PLC MD for the operating system system data 8 3 8 3 PLC MD for function blocks FB data 8 12 8 4 PLC MD for the user 8 12 8 5 PLC MD for the operating system system bits 8 1...

Page 12: ... 3 Resolution block diagram 10 6 10 2 4 Resolution codes 10 7 10 2 5 Permissible resolution combinations 10 8 10 2 6 The influence of resolution on velocity 10 9 10 2 7 Maximum velocity for thread cutting 10 11 10 2 8 Maximum traversing range 10 12 10 2 9 Influence on the display 10 15 10 2 10 Influence on the modes function 10 15 10 3 BERO SW 4 and higher 10 18 10 4 Axis installation 10 19 10 4 1...

Page 13: ...up procedure via streamer 11 7 11 1 5 Restarting after MMC CPU replacement 11 8 11 1 6 Loading via V24 interface or FD E2 11 9 11 1 7 Loading from hard disk control startup with user data 11 10 11 1 8 CPU replacement 11 15 12 Functional Descriptions 12 1 12 1 Leadscrew error compensation 6FC5 150 0AH01 0AA0 12 1 12 1 1 Corresponding data 12 1 12 1 2 Functional description 12 1 12 2 Rotary axis fun...

Page 14: ...ositioning mode M19 M19 through several revolutions 12 38 General 12 38 Selecting the positioning mode 12 39 Data required 12 39 The positioning sequence 12 40 Gain factor change 12 47 Aborting the positioning mode 12 49 Curved acceleration characteristic SW 4 and higher 12 49 12 7 2 4 C axis mode 12 53 General 12 53 Selection and deselection of the C axis mode 12 54 Block search via blocks with M...

Page 15: ...t start up 12 93 12 11 3 4 Special start up cases 12 94 12 11 3 5 Start up after data loss 12 94 12 12 Path dimension from PLC 12 95 General notes 12 95 12 12 1 Execution of the function Path dimension from the PLC 12 95 12 12 2 Termination of the function Path dimension from the PLC 12 96 12 12 3 Interruption 12 96 12 12 4 Meaning of NC MD 5008 bit 7 12 97 12 12 5 Influence of the modes on the pa...

Page 16: ...2 12 18 4 1 Setpoint link 12 132 12 18 4 2 Actual value link 12 133 12 18 4 3 Setpoint velocity actual position link SW 4 and higher 12 133 General 12 133 Parameterization 12 133 Compensatory control 12 134 12 18 5 Curve gearbox interpolation CGI SW 4 and higher 12 135 12 18 5 1 General 12 135 12 18 5 2 Functional description 12 135 12 18 6 Variable cascading of GI following drives SW 4 and higher...

Page 17: ...tion 12 182 12 19 3 Interlocks and monitoring 12 184 12 19 4 Temperature compensation TC 12 187 12 19 4 1 Types of influence 12 187 12 19 4 2 Functional description 12 189 12 19 4 3 Data structure 12 189 12 19 4 4 Activation of function 12 190 12 19 5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 12 191 12 19 5 1 Functional description 12 193 12 19 5 2 Data structures and data assignment 12 194 12 19...

Page 18: ...al value system for workpiece 12 240 12 23 1 Corresponding data 12 240 12 23 2 Reference systems 12 240 12 23 3 Functional description 12 241 12 23 4 Example of function 12 242 12 24 Travel to fixed stop 12 243 12 24 1 Corresponding data 12 243 12 24 2 Functional description 12 243 12 24 3 Travel to fixed stop with analog drives 12 245 12 24 4 Travel to fixed stop with fixed clamping torque torque...

Page 19: ...2 298 12 29 1 Functional description 12 298 12 29 2 General hardware conditions for Extended measurement 12 301 12 30 Master slave for drives SW 4 4 and higher option 12 304 12 30 1 Corresponding data 12 304 General notes 12 304 12 30 2 Difference to synchronous spindle GI 12 305 12 30 3 Function description 12 305 12 30 4 Activating deactivating the master slave torque compensation control 12 308...

Page 20: ... application of low pass as current setpoint filter 12 340 12 33 3 3 Scope of application of bandstops as current setpoint filter 12 342 12 33 4 Speed dependent current setpoint filter 12 347 12 33 4 1 Machine data 12 347 12 33 4 2 Description 12 347 12 33 5 Speed setpoint filter 12 348 12 33 5 1 Machine data 12 348 12 33 5 2 Bandstops and low passes as speed setpoint filter 12 349 12 34 Actual va...

Page 21: ...rsonnel support for work on the interface unit work on the machine machine operation and customer produced PLC program Recommendation Prelimit travel ranges greater clearance distances by displacing the end stop EMERGENCY STOP cam The specified machine data is available Data carriers are available for checking machine specific functions 1 2 Visual inspection General remarks Refer to the EMC Guidel...

Page 22: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 23: ...scribed installation of the graduated scales air gap etc and the pulse generators coupling also see Heidenhain installation and adjustment instructions Check to make sure that the connectors are correctly wired and properly inserted If the customer has inserted plug socket connectors in the measuring circuit cables a careful check must be made to ensure connection strain relief and above all obser...

Page 24: ...rence problems 1 2 7 Interference suppression All d c and a c relays must be interference suppressed using suitable means as must a c or three phase motors e g lubricating pumps and the like Observance of the prescribed measures for interference suppression should be checked on a random basis also refer to the Instruction Manual 1 2 8 Operator panel Check to make sure that pushbuttons keys lamps s...

Page 25: ...e input resolution The following applies 1 unit MS 2 units of position control resolution 1 unit IS 1 unit of input resolution Example If the position control resolution is 0 0005 mm and the input resolution is 0 001 mm then 1 unit IS 1 unit MS 1 µm Refer to NC MD 5002 NC MD 1800 NC MD 524 for details on input position control and display resolution 1 2 12 Input units Unit MS 2 units of position c...

Page 26: ...ystem software This is of particular importance if the system software is changed or upgraded because the control can then become subject to export approval Identification of control In addition to the specifications on the delivery note and the invoice unambiguous labels identify the delivered software components as Standard or Export versions The package contains additional labels for identifyin...

Page 27: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 28: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a No a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 29: ...EMORY 640K FOUND TESTING SYSTEM MEMORY PASS CHECKING UNEXPECTED INTERRUPTS AND STUCK NMI PASS TESTING PROTECTED MODE PASS SIZING EXTENDED MEMORY 3072K FOUND TESTING MEMORY IN PROTECTED MODE 3072K PASS TESTING PROCESSOR EXCEPTION INTERRUPTS PASS BIOS SHADOW RAM ENABLED VIDEO SHADOW RAM ENABLED Powering up Hard disk check as from SW 4 During booting from the MMC area the consistency of the hard disk...

Page 30: ... are output if an error occurs If the file system cannot be restored ERROR in file system can t fix If the WOP work file cannot be created ERROR on WOP working file can t create After these error messages the previous message Can t start MMC REBOOTING appears Then the system branches to DOS Selection menu SETUP CONFIGURE OPTIONS The following entry has been added to the menu so that the WOP workin...

Page 31: ...s into the booted system program and requests the following data from the MMC the UMS unless a customer UMS has been installed and activated the SIEMENS standard UMS is loaded if the UMS size has been set to 0 memory configuration as from SW 4 all user data records which were found in the data management tree under user NC data in the user branch Data records of the IKA etc type are recognized and...

Page 32: ...rmation please refer to the Catalog 2 1 1 Erasing the S RAM area of the NCK as from SW 6 General notes In order to obtain a defined initial state when installing upgrading the control you must erase the S RAM of the NCK CPU In this way you will avoid errors caused by incorrectly initialized data Explanation The S RAM of the NCK CPU contains data that must be stored permanently in the control even ...

Page 33: ...attery in the case of power failure Load system software from magnetic tape see Backup Section 4 MMC CPU supplied with system software Yes No Connect Valitek streamer Switch on Booting performed in Backup menu Switch off General reset mode refer to General Reset Section Start up switch on CSB in position Start up 1 Switch on Softkey time date Set time and date Load MD in MDD Configure memory as fr...

Page 34: ...ral reset mode display Yes No Start up switch on CSB in position Start up 1 NC ON OFF Start up softkey Operating area DIAGNOSIS Password entry possible Yes No Operating area DIAGNOSIS Operating area DIAGNOSIS GENERAL RESET MODE softkey Fig 2 1 see next page 2 General Reset and Standard Start Up 2 2 Standard installation and start up as flowchart as from SW 3 08 96 ...

Page 35: ... MODE Then a general reset of the NCK and the PLC is to be carried out The PLC user memory is deleted and any existing user program is copied from the hard disk to the PLC If the PLC is to be cleared the ANW_PROG program must previously be deleted on the hard disk More than one PLC program can be managed under SERVICES however ANW_PROG is the only program to be loaded in the PLC during general res...

Page 36: ...d onto the hard disk as ANW_PROG file If the software is to be upgraded this function must be executed before a forced boot Terminates general reset mode This function triggers a POWER ON RESET CAUTION It is also possible to use the RECALL key for leaving the general reset screen but then no mode switchover is involved The control consequently remains in general reset mode operating the machine fo...

Page 37: ...o 4 920 kB UMS 0 to 1 024 kB 0 to 2 760 kB 1 IKA 0 to 1 024 kB 0 to 65 535 points 0 to 1 024 kB 0 to 65 535 points FDD MSD 0 or 194 388 kB 0 or 194 388 kB Block buffer 0 to 2 760 kB 0 to approx 1 800 buffers 0 to 5 026 kB 0 to approx 3 450 buffers Measured value memory 0 to 2 760 kB 0 to 700 000 meas values 0 to 2 760 kB 0 to 700 000 meas values Number of real axes Axes 15 to 30 16 kB each Data fo...

Page 38: ...easured value memory see Sect 12 Extended measuring Inputs Procedure for changing the memory configuration Step Operation 1 Select general reset mode in the operating area diagnostics 2 Selection of the file function SK machine data SK NC MD key ETC SK memory config SK file function 3 Copy the file NCMEMCFG from the Siemens branch to the user branch with SK Preset Caution If the file NCMEMCFG is a...

Page 39: ...The MD in the NCK area are cleared 3 SK Load from disk and assigned stan dard values 4 Select STANDARD dard values 5 SK Load from disk PLC MD cycl MD Initial start up On initial start up state as supplied from Siemens no files are available in the User data window see Fig Subsequent start up On subsequent start up user files from the User data window can be loaded instead of the files STANDD_T STA...

Page 40: ...d of standard With the following steps you can terminate standard start up start up Step Description 1 Enter the area General reset mode using the Recall key and the General reset mode softkey There you can execute the functions PLC initial clear Format NCK AWS and possibly Drive gen reset for digital drive systems only 2 Deselection of General reset mode see also the flow diagram below Set the sw...

Page 41: ...d softkey 1 S U switch on CSB set to Start up position Yes No S U switch on CSB set to 0 Yes No NORMAL MODE S U switch on CSB set to 0 and power on Password is deleted PLC is restarted Power on routine for NC software is running START 2 General Reset and Standard Start Up 2 7 Deselect general reset mode 1 in SW 3 softkey end of GENERAL RESET ...

Page 42: ... Interface Description Part 2 3 Observe Section 1 of the Installation Guide carefully 4 Installation of the axes and spindles including the speed controller 5 Servo disable set at the hardware level for all axes and spindles 6 All input output modules and handwheels connected 7 NC MD and PLC MD entered 8 All data in particular NC MD and PLC MD must be checked for validity 9 Enclose the installatio...

Page 43: ...ODE MACHINE PARAMETER PROGRAMM SERVICES DIAGNOSIS Enter password Fig 2 3 The password for the NCK area is set in machine data 11 The default value 0 corresponds to password Any other value defined in machine data 11 must have four digits The value is accepted with the INPUT key and the text ENTER PASSWORD disappears The password is reset with the Lock password softkey If the password has not been ...

Page 44: ... up sequence is obligatory since the NC and PLC machine data must have been entered before the user memory is formatted and the part program memory is deleted DEL LOAD MACH DATA The delete load screenform is displayed DELETE NC MD NC MD are deleted and formatted or NC MD LOAD T VERSION or NC MD LOAD M VERSION Standard MD for T or M version are loaded If files exist on hard disk in the DIAGNOSIS NC...

Page 45: ...offsets tool offsets R parameters cycle setting data are deleted and formatted FORMAT PART PROGRAM The dialog text DELETE DATA is displayed If the Format part program softkey is pressed again the part programs are dele ted and formatted Activating the PLC GENERAL RESET softkey calls the PLC functions screen form The PLC general reset softkey is pressed again for starting PLC general reset Activati...

Page 46: ...andard installation and start up as flowchart up to SW 2 only START Voltage test Functional test NC MD PLC MD Axis start up Spindle start up Test run Save data to HD of MMC CPU END 2 General Reset and Standard Start Up 2 10 Standard installation and start up as flowchart up to SW 2 only ...

Page 47: ...a Parameter softkey 1 NC diagnostics softkey NC start up softkey Press PLC MD softkey Go back with RECALL key General reset mode softkey END Correct PLC MD Entries cannot be made until password has been entered Start up end softkey Enter PLC MD 2 General Reset and Standard Start Up 2 11 Enter PLC machine data up to SW 2 only 1 SW 1 only ...

Page 48: ...a Parameter softkey 1 NC diagnostics softkey NC start up softkey Press PLC MD softkey Go back with RECALL key General reset mode softkey END Correct PLC MD Entries cannot be made until password has been entered Start up end softkey Enter PLC MD 2 General Reset and Standard Start Up 2 12 Enter NC machine data up to SW 2 only 1 SW 1 only ...

Page 49: ...m drift compen sation NC MD 272 END Feed hold Yes No Alarm Yes No Alarm Yes No 1000 mm set movement 1000 mm at machine Yes No All axes traversed No Check the enables Check of PLC program Feed enable Yes No Position control direction OK s Sect 5 check MDs Check MDs 256 260 268 276 280 264 364 368 NC MD 364 368 1800 Yes 2 General Reset and Standard Start Up 2 13 Axis installation simplified up to SW...

Page 50: ...TORE Spindle enable Spindle contr enable 1st gear speed processed Yes No Select 1st gear speed Select next gear speed Spindle rotating No Correct dir of rotation Yes No Change bit 1 of NC MD 521 Analog spindle speed Yes No With 840 M Buy option No Check NC MD 403 to 410 and tacho com pensation Bit 7 NC MD 521 1 Yes No Set Bit 7 in NC MD 521 and POWER ON Enter spindle drift NC MD 401 Further gear s...

Page 51: ...d RESTART EPROM submodule as from software version 3 the operating system and the user program are loaded from hard disk into RAM S PLC CPU 135 WD without interface PLC as from software version 3 the ope rating system and the user program are loaded from hard disk into RAM Connection of the programming device PG 7 S5 PLC COM1 RS 232 C MODEM Interface PLC or PLC 135 WD PG function via MMC Link to X...

Page 52: ...ions can thus be executed on the operating panel or on an MF2 keyboard Operation via the opera tor panel or MF2 keyboard is restricted compared with operation on the program mer For the connection between the MMC and the PLC on line operation the follow ing cable is required MMC CPU X151 6FC9340 8W PLC CPU X111 see INTERFACE DESCRIPTION PART 2 CONNECTION CONDITIONS The PG function via MMC is mainl...

Page 53: ... installed in the BACKUP menu see Sec tion BACKUP Operation Starting from the DIAGNOSIS area the function can be selected using softkey PG function When operating the PG functions via the operator panel or MF2 keyboard please note the following changes in the key functions Key on the operator panel Key on the MF2 keyboard1 Equivalent key function on the programming device SK1 F3 F1 SK2 F4 F2 SK3 F...

Page 54: ... Shift Shift DEL Delete field Shift DEL 0 INS Enter 0 INSERT ENTER End of input return Pg Up Scroll up 9 Shift Shift Pg Up 9 Page up Shift Pg Dn 3 Scroll down Shift Shift Pg Dn 3 Page down Shift 5 5 CORR Editing mode no meaning ESC no meaning no meaning F11 no meaning no meaning F12 no meaning 3 PLC Installation 3 2 PG function via MMC 1 Delete with the backspace key ...

Page 55: ...or panel S Data exchange with external PGs can only be performed with the FD E2 diskette unit 3 3 PLC general reset PLC general reset With NC operator panel Select general reset mode PLC general reset or PG 7xx See Section 2 General reset See Programming Guide 3 4 Procedure for starting up the PLC Overview Load user program File ANW_PROG exists Check Operator area Services SK Data management Dir P...

Page 56: ...then plugged into the X321 submodule slot with the control being switched off 2 Select general reset on the control SK Diagnosis SK NC diagnosis SK NC start up SK General reset 3 Then the PLC gen reset softkey in the General reset installation menu is pressed to select deletion of the user memory and subse quent copying of the PLC user program from the EPROM submodule into the RAM memory The selec...

Page 57: ...s the Save PLC SK to achieve this The selection becomes effective as soon as the End general reset mode SK is pressed The PLC user program is stored in the Services area under User PLC Programs as ANW_PRG file You can also copy this program to another name In this way you can store a number of different PLC user programs on the hard disk Note If you press the PLC gen reset softkey the PLC user pro...

Page 58: ...es password to PLC data I O F D T C 5 Timeout Timeout analysis of write access 3 5 1 LED display After switching on the mains voltage the interface control runs a self diagnostics program This program tests the most important hardware components and initiali zes the software required for continuing system start up If errors in the system are recognized the LED on the front plate displays the error...

Page 59: ...m restart after setting up overall reset S STOZUS operating status bit set acquisition of interupt event or continuation of the STOP state see Section 8 S Cold restart or warm restart attempt aborted If the STOZUS identifier is set the control remains in the STOP state If in the second section testing of run up after switching on the mains voltage the STOZUS identifier is not set but one of the ot...

Page 60: ...oop A more precise analysis of the error can be obtained using the programmer or the detailed error coding integrated into the control The interrupt stack and the de tailed error coding are available for this which are kept up to date in the Installa tion List up to SW4 and in the Diagnostics Guide for SW5 and higher Selection S Up to software version 2 SK Diagnosis SK NC diagnosis SK Service disp...

Page 61: ...sis SK NC diagnosis SK Service display SK PLC error recognition S Software version 3 and higher SK Diagnosis SK Service display SK PLC service IW QW FW DB DX C T KM KH KF KT KC DW DD parallel KH KF Data areas Read Write Data number Input word x x 0 126 Output word x x 0 126 Flag word x x 0 254 Data word x x 0 254 Data double word x x 0 254 Times x 0 255 Counter x 0 255 Operator entries in PLC STAT...

Page 62: ...with DD Example Selecting DW 5 in DB 10 PLC Status softkey DW softkey Keys to select DB 10 Softkey DW 1 Keys to preselect word no 5 S Reading the contents of timers and counters Softkey T or C Keys Preselect timer or counter number 6 The time is always displayed in seconds regardless of how it was program med in STEP 5 The count is displayed in BCD code Display formats KM Binary numbers 0 and 1 KH...

Page 63: ...cy cle has finished Machine data 6049 0 must be set in order to be able to determine the exact cause of a timeout 3 6 Procedure for error search after PLC stop The table below describes the procedure for an error search in the PLC after alarm PLC CPU failure has been displayed on the operator panel Step Description 1 Alarm display on operator panel PLC CPU failure 2 LED on PLC CPU flashing evaluat...

Page 64: ...additional value in MD11 must be 4 digits long The standard value 0 corres ponds to password 1 1 1 1 Enter digit 1 four times using the keyboard Confirm with the INPUT key Set the password with the SET key If the password is set correctly the following text appears in the alarm line 120000 PASSWORD SET With the softkey DELETE you can clear the password the message 120001 PASSWORD RESET then appear...

Page 65: ... control in the area in question A message text appears on the display in Ger man and English indicating how to operate the toggle field Password Changing the language is password protected i e of you press the softkey OK it is possible to enter the password subsequently Softkey OK With the softkey OK you can take over the changed configuration which is acti vated on the next start up The diagnost...

Page 66: ...creen colour BCOLORMONO_DEF a 15 1 CO for colour screen or a 15 1 MO for monochrome screen Second entry for output format BHARDCOPY_DEF a 15 6 CO TIFF or a 15 6 MO PCX With these settings you can create the following file formats Entry in BEDCONF a 151 a 156 File format generated CO PCX X PCX compressed color MO PCX X PCX compressed monochrome CO TIFF X TIF compressed color MO TIFF X TIF uncompres...

Page 67: ...ws you the alarms currently pending With the vertical softkey bar it is possible to switch to the display of the current messages Fig 4 2 Initial display of the diagnosis area With these softkey functions you can sort the alarms messages currently pending by priority or chronologically Press this softkey to display the current messages Switch back to display of the alarms See Section Simplified la...

Page 68: ...rved 6FC5197 jAA50 4 5 SINUMERIK 840C IA Fig 4 3 Default setting All alarms and messages are included Default setting All reset and power ON alarms are included Note Both files are configured in the CONFIG file Fig 4 4 Alarm log 1 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4 1 4 Selection of the diagnosis area ...

Page 69: ...iled error coding PLC status For description see under subsection Drive service displays for spindle and axis For OEM applications Fig 4 5 In SW4 the logbook contains the current version numbers of the software compo nents installed on the hard disk As from SW5 the first line also indicates the sum software version Caution As from SW4 no entries must be made in the logbook because it would be over...

Page 70: ...iption see Section 2 general reset and standard start up On initial start up or after data loss e g because a module has been removed hardware defect in a module or flat back up battery on power failure data can be assigned standard values in initial clear mode For a description see Subsection PC data The operation system can be set in configuration files The files are preset to de fault values Th...

Page 71: ...l value are identical In standstill the difference following error can be compensated with the drift compensation S Abs compensation value Sum of IKA and temperature compensations S Speed setpoint in 0 01 of the maximum speed Digital value which has been determined by the control system maximum value see NC MD 268 This is converted into an analog value 0 V to 10 V on the measuring circuit module a...

Page 72: ...set is displayed S Service no See the Diagnostics Guide for the list of service nos Service values are displayed in double size i e in position control resolution unit e g following error displayed 2000 with position control resolution 0 5 mm the result is a true following error of 1000 mm 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4 2 NC Service ...

Page 73: ... axes spindles Service Axes single display Axis 1 1 8 Following error Absolute actual value Absolute setpoint value Abs compensation val Speed set value 0 01 Part actual value Contour deviation Synchronous run error Parameter block position control Parameter block gear control Service number Fig see Section Start Up Service axes and spindles 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4 2 1 Selection of service data ...

Page 74: ...setting data or MD S Actual speed value rev min The pulses sent by the spindle encoder are evaluated by the NC and dis played as speed in rev min S Position set value The spindle position preset in degrees by the user is converted by the NC intop the corresponding number of pulses e g 0_ 0 180_ 2048 359_ 4059 S Actual position value The pulses sent by the spindle encoder are evaluated and displaye...

Page 75: ...ssary you move back to the previous axes with the Page up key 4 3 Drive service displays for spindle MSD and axis FDD as from SW 3 Diagnosis Service display Drive MSD FDD Explanation Press the Diagnosis Service display and Drive MSD FDD softkeys to call up the drive service display MSD 1st screen Fig 4 6 Explanation The drive service display MSD 1st screen gives you an overview of the signals and ...

Page 76: ...nfeed regenerative terminal 63 48 feedback unit SW 3 drive MD 11 2 pulse suppression for all drives SW 4 MD 1700 2 Possible display range off or on Drive enable This display field contains the status of terminal 64 of the infeed regenerative terminal 64 63 feedback unit SW 3 drive MD 11 6 for all drives SW 4 drive MD 1700 6 Possible display range off or on Pulse enable This display field contains ...

Page 77: ...d actual value of the motor SW 3 drive MD 2 SW 4 drive MD 1707 Speed setpoint This display field contains the current speed setpoint of the motor SW 3 drive MD 1 SW 4 drive MD 1706 Capacity utilization This display field shows the capacity utilization of the main spindle drive Up to the rated speed the ratio of torque to maximum torque is displayed and above the rated speed the ratio of power to m...

Page 78: ...ta 0 8 Off 1 8 On after the drive has returned status signal to SERVO 2 8 On line communication possible 3 8 Bootstrap drive must be rebooted 4 8 Connected drive ramp up completed 5 8 Ready drive under closed loop control Power On Main spindle drive This display field describes the actual MSD drive i e the one which has been selected using softkeys drive Set up mode actual This display field shows...

Page 79: ...ve MD 11007 0 IMdI Mdx SW 4 This display field shows the current status of the message IMdI Mdx drive MD 11007 1 InactI nmin SW 4 This display field shows the current status of the message InactI nmin drive MD 11007 2 InactI nx SW 4 This display field shows the current status of the message InactI nx drive MD 11007 3 nset nact SW 4 This display field shows the current status of the message nset na...

Page 80: ... screen softkey in the service area for drive MSD FDD Fig 4 8 Explanation The drive service display FDD 1st screen gives you an overview of the signals and statuses of the MSD drives and is only a display This specific drive data NC PLC Drives set determine the contents of the display fields Explanation of display fields FDD 1st screen Drive status This display field describes the ramp up and oper...

Page 81: ...play field contains the current set parameter set of cyclic control word 2 parameter drive MD 11005 0 2 Possible display range 0 7 CRC error This display field contains the number of bus transmission errors between NC and drive detected by the hardware drive MD 11001 Possible display range 0000 FFFF Message ZK1 This display field contains the state of message state class 1 of cyclic status word 1 ...

Page 82: ...t determine the contents of the display fields Explanation of display fields FDD 2nd screen Drive status This display field describes the ramp up operating status of the digital drives This status is generated in the SERVO during start up and then changed accor dingly in the display SW 4 drive MD 11008 Possible data 0 8 Off 1 8 On after the drive has returned status signal to SERVO 2 8 On line com...

Page 83: ...r on Integrator inhibit This display field shows the status of the integrator inhibit of cyclic status word 1 actual value drive MD 11003 6 Possible display range off or on Motor temperature This display field shows the state of the motor temperature warning warning drive MD 11006 14 Possible display range off or on Heat sink temperature This display field shows the state of the heat sink temperat...

Page 84: ...Section Machine data dialog MDD SW 3 and higher Introduction The user interface of the 840C control is divided into MACHINE PARAMETERS PROGRAMMING SERVICES and DIAGNOSIS function areas 1 You can set up the operator system using a configuration file and a series of other files The files initially contain default values but you can change these with the ASCII editor in the MMC area DIAGNOSIS the ASC...

Page 85: ...e input image of the machine con trol panel In this case the position of the keyswitch is not evaluated on start up Keyswitch position 3 is set internally on PLC stop 4 4 1 Copying and editing PC data Selection Pressing the softkeys DIAGNOSIS START UP and PC DATA will take you into the basic display for PC data Fig 4 11 The control is supplied with system data from the directories MASTER CON TROL ...

Page 86: ...ally want to overwrite the data in the USER branch Example Suppose we want to copy the file CONFIG into the directory MASTER CON TROL First press the Home key to select the SIEMENS branch in the basic display of the PC data Now press the cursor key to select the directory MASTER CONTROL and confirm with the INPUT key Now press the cursor key to select the file CONFIG Fig 4 12 4 MMC Area Diagnosis ...

Page 87: ...ss the softkey PRESET to copy the file into the USER branch from SW 5 a configuration window is also displayed Fig 4 13 It does not matter which branch is selected The PRESET softkey always copies the file selected in the SIEMENS branch 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4 4 1 Copying and editing PC data ...

Page 88: ... to 80 characters each Each line consists of a reserved word Comments be gin with the characters and go on to the end of the line Description The configuration file CONFIG contains the parameters for the following as reser ved words words reserved by the system S the language S the operator panel interface S the format and number of the entries in the alarm logs S the priority of the alarms messag...

Page 89: ... FLUSHLEN 2 Maximum number of messages buffered for the service log S FLUSHTIME Maximum buffering time for messages in milliseconds S PROTMASK1 Type of messages to be entered in the alarm log 1 S PROTMASK2 Type of messages to be entered in the service log S PRIO_PO Display priority of NCK alarms with alarm type power on 1 S PRIO_RE Display priority of NCK alarms with alarm type reset 1 S PRIO_CA D...

Page 90: ...tring of max 20 characters see above hh mm ss DD MM YY Language This defines the language The possible languages are S DEUTSCH S ENGLISH S ITALIANO S FRANÇAIS S ESPAÑOL The default setting is DEUTSCH upper case mandatory For certain software versions SWEDISH RUSSIAN and HUNGARIAN are available SYSFONT With SW 4 4 and higher the character set is defined by an entry in the character set number confi...

Page 91: ...attributes of these messages and the limitations which apply to them Each mes sage attribute is abbreviated to its initial letter Number Klasse class Type Priority The limitations are specified using the characters and Examples N 1000 Messages with a number greater than 1000 are logged P 5 Messages with a priority less than 5 are logged P 0 Messages with a priority of 0 are logged N50 100 Messages...

Page 92: ...d disk HD General The SINUMERIK 840C system software allows you to reduce the number of ac cesses to the hard disk HD of the MMC CPU This helps to extend the service life of the hard disk The reduction of the number of accesses to the MMC CPU hard disk is particularly advisable for machines with a high rate of vibration Most accesses to the hard disk HD of the MMC CPU occur in the automatic mode a...

Page 93: ...t by entering the following command in the configuration file CONFIG MELDCACHE n Be sure that a capacity of approx 100 byte RAM is reserved for each item in the cache Use the command MELDCACHE 0 to provide for the same compatible behavior as is applicable to systems with SW 6 and lower 4 4 3 BEDCONF configuration file Description Various BEDCONF files are available The configuration data stored in...

Page 94: ...A 286 S5_PR 286 MDD 286 IBSAI 286 SIMREG 286 BAPPLRUNNAM i 1 1 15000 BAPPLIND a 2 1 3 100 100 14 100 100 9 100 2 100 5 2 5 5 5 2 BAPPLSONLIST i 1 1 15000 BAPPLIND a 2 1 0 1 2 0 0 4 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 BAPPLSTARTLIST i 1 1 15000 BAPPLIND a 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 BAPPLCLUTLIST i 1 1 15000 BAPPLIND a 2 1 5 0 0 0 4 0 0 4 1 0 0 0 3 0 0 2 BAPPLLANLIST i 1 1 15000 BAPPLIND a 2 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 95: ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TermiServices a 1 1 3 a 2 1 105 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TermiDiagnosis a 1 1 3 a 2 1 106 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TermiUser a 1 1 3 a 2 1 107 14 11 12 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TermiWOP a 2 1 107 11 12 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TermiWOP a 1 1 3 a 2 1 108 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TermiPLC a 1 1 3 a 2 1 109 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TermiPLC_DG a 1 1 3 ...

Page 96: ...ONF depending on the software version BAPPL CLUTLIST The parameter BAPPL CLUTLIST defines whether a CLUT list is assigned to the area in question Enter a 1 to activate the CLUT list assigned to this area BSYSFONT The parameter BSYSFONT assigns a character set to the language which is set in the KONFIG configuration file in the MASTER CONTROL area The value 0 is assigned to the European languages S...

Page 97: ...mment characters in front of the value e g a 1 7 0 3600000 Note CLUT Color Look up Table MO Monochrome mode CO Color mode PO Positive mode NE NEGATIVE mode Caution There is also a screen saver in the PLC DB48 BANZLINESMZ_DEF The parameter BANZLINESMZ_DEF The number of lines in the message line either one or two is defined in BANZLINESMZ_DEF The following values are permissible 1 one line message l...

Page 98: ...LC see Interface Part 1 Mutual exclusion of applications depending on the capacity of the main memory Because the main memory capacity is not unlimited some applications are mutu ally exclusive A termination list therefore exists for every application This list contains the applications that must be terminated to be able to start the selected application Example The possible applications are defin...

Page 99: ...acters and place them in front of the three immediately preceding lines instead Because it is only possible to process the file in the user branch the file BED CONF is copied there by Preset 4 4 3 2 Configuring file BEDCONF in directory OPERATION PROGRAM Example The text in the toggle fields for the screen form channel information for setting the wait marks is configured in the BEDCONF file variab...

Page 100: ...der LF 38 d 1 1 0 LF 39 LF Fig 4 16 4 4 3 3 Configuration file BEDCONF in directory Operation DIAGNOS If changes are made in the system menus NC service PLC service and NC info line d 2 5 51 127 0 105 0 102 0 NC service PLC service NC info must be replaced by d 2 5 51 127 4 105 4 102 4 NC service PLC service NC info in this file 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4 4 3 BEDCONF configuration file ...

Page 101: ... four tables named POCOCLUT POMOCLUT NECO CLUT and NEMOCLUT Color tables are ASCII files that can be edited with the editor A color table con tains the definitions of 16 colors each defined on a separate line The example below shows POCOCLUT with its default values There are global CLUTs and CLUTs The global CLUTS are stored in the directory BASIC SETTINGS and the area CLUTs are stored in the indi...

Page 102: ...area If no CLUTs are available in the user branch OPERATION MACHINE they must be copied from the Siemens branch to the user branch with the softkey Fig 4 18 The file POCOCLUT is selected with the cursor in the user area OPERATION MACHINE and softkey EDIT Fig 4 19 Color table POCOCLUT 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4 4 5 Color mapping lists ...

Page 103: ... 1000 492 0 102 free2 0 0 0 free 0 0 0 110 free1 0 0 0 free 0 0 0 12 grey 159 159 159 grey 159 159 159 13 petrol 0 508 444 petrol 0 508 444 14 free 0 0 0 free 0 0 0 15 free 0 0 0 free 0 0 0 Color table POMOCLUT NEMOCLUT Color index Color Red Green Blue Color Red Green Blue 0 black 0 0 0 black 0 0 0 1 grey 256 256 256 grey 794 794 794 2 black 0 0 0 white 1000 1000 1000 3 black 0 0 0 white 1000 1000...

Page 104: ...described in the section Color settings for mono chrome display For positive screen display For negative screen display Color table POCOCLUT NECOCLUT Standard setting Color index Color Red Green Blue Color Red Green Blue 0 black 0 0 0 black 0 0 0 1 red 1000 0 0 red 1000 0 0 2 green 0 690 0 green 0 760 0 3 blue 0 0 690 blue 0 0 1000 4 yellow 1000 1000 0 yellow 1000 1000 0 5 violet 565 188 439 viole...

Page 105: ... 0 white 1000 1000 1000 3 black 0 0 0 white 1000 1000 1000 4 black 376 376 376 white 1000 1000 1000 5 grey 376 376 376 grey 627 627 627 6 grey 627 627 627 grey 627 627 627 7 white 1000 1000 1000 white 1000 1000 1000 8 grey 376 376 376 grey 376 376 376 9 grey 0 0 0 grey 376 376 376 10 free 627 627 627 free 627 627 627 11 free 0 0 0 free 0 0 0 12 grey 627 627 627 grey 376 376 376 13 grey 627 627 627...

Page 106: ...ion file of the operator system a 1 5 1 MZ BCOLORMONO_DEF a 1 5 2 NE BPOSNEG_DEF Example 1 for entries in the configuration file a 1 5 1 MZ BCOLORMONO_DEF a 1 5 2 NE BPOSNEG_DEF The color table with the name POC1CLUT is loaded for the corresponding application if it is available there otherwise the color table POCOCLUT is taken as standard set ting Example 2 for entries in the configuration file a...

Page 107: ...0 45 0 46 0 47 0 48 0 49 0 50 0 51 0 52 0 53 0 54 0 55 0 56 0 57 0 58 0 59 0 60 0 61 0 62 0 63 0 64 7 65 8 66 7 67 8 68 1 69 5 70 7 71 7 72 5 73 9 74 7 75 1 76 12 77 9 78 12 79 7 80 12 81 2 82 7 83 5 84 0 85 13 86 7 87 8 88 7 89 12 90 12 91 0 92 1 93 3 94 9 95 0 96 5 97 5 98 9 99 8 100 9 101 7 102 0 103 3 104 6 105 2 106 4 107 0 108 0 109 0 110 0 111 0 112 7 113 8 114 7 115 8 116 7 117 7 118 0 7 1...

Page 108: ...r definition table POCOCLUT number 1 stands for red The standard color for alarms is therefore red If we replace the 1 by a 4 the color of the text of alarms changes to yellow Symbolic color Picture elements Back ground color Text color Text back ground Border color Border backgr MMC area bar normal 85 84 85 102 90 MMC area bar active 87 86 87 Message line for alarms 76 75 76 102 90 Message line f...

Page 109: ...line 74 72 74 91 88 Part program cursor 73 88 Pseudo part program cursor 83 88 Actual values 83 88 Other 91 88 91 88 Tab 4 2 continued Assignment of picture elements to symbolic colors Note The colors 82 and 83 are used in the NCK displays In the MMC displays color index 97 is used for the text background of the display header line and color index 60 is used for the text color Therefore if changes...

Page 110: ...2 0 43 0 44 0 45 0 46 0 47 0 48 0 49 0 50 0 51 0 52 0 53 0 54 0 55 0 56 0 57 0 58 0 59 0 60 0 61 0 62 0 63 0 64 0 65 14 66 7 67 0 68 0 69 14 70 0 71 7 72 5 73 4 74 0 75 2 76 0 77 4 78 15 79 7 80 11 81 2 82 0 83 4 84 2 85 15 86 15 87 14 88 0 89 12 90 8 91 7 92 1 93 2 94 4 95 3 96 6 97 5 98 12 99 8 100 4 101 7 102 0 103 6 104 3 105 0 106 4 107 0 108 0 109 0 110 0 111 0 112 1 113 8 114 12 115 11 116 ...

Page 111: ...data directory in the user branch which defines them as user cycles They can then be protected in the same way as standard cycles via cycle disable see Interface Part 1 User cycles in the NC DATA directory cannot be edited It is possible to read in and out via the RS 232 C in PC format from SW 5 Deletes user cycles in the NC DATA directory Note Cycle disable must be configured in the PLC user prog...

Page 112: ...r of real axes limits the entry Axis exists in the menu NC config uration This also applies to spindles channels and mode groups Press the MODIFY OPTIONS softkey to select the function Press the INPUT key to save the option password If the password is not entered correctly the message WRONG OPTION PASS WORD is displayed Press the OK softkey to acknowledge Pressing the OK softkey activates the opti...

Page 113: ...ernal PC Up to SW 1 it is not possible to store any user data using the VALITEK streamer hardware option With SW 2 and higher user data can be stored separately It is necessary to perform a BACKUP after every start up otherwise all data would be lost if there were a fault on the MMC CPU The choice of VALITEK streamer or PC link can be made via the menu Set I O device Caution The software for the B...

Page 114: ...om ply with the electromagnetic compatibility requirements for cables used during normal operations It may therefore only be used for service purposes parallel transmission cable Order No 6FX2 002 1AA02 1AD0 12 More about the installation sequence is explained in the readme txt file in the root directory of the CD ROM Note Select the respective menu item Backup or Restore in the control menu befor...

Page 115: ...hen you have pressed the softkey BACKUP the following screen appears Fig 4 22 Press the softkey START to activate the function BACKUP The main menu is displayed from which you can choose between the following functions As from SW 4 you are prompted to enter the correct time and date Press the Input key to confirm your input The values are activated after Power ON 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4 6 BACKUP wi...

Page 116: ...ch are transferred from the hard disk to the streamer Restore user data With the function RESTORE USER DATA it is possible to transfer a complete previous BACKUP copy of the user data from the streamer onto the hard disk of the MMC CPU Any existing user data of the same name are overwritten Note Other user data are not deleted Free data transfer Uninstall NCK If you select the function UNINSTALL N...

Page 117: ... disk similar to the DOS command CHKDSK Set new configuration To set the intervals at which the check file system procedure is to be per formed when the control is booted Reset to default configuration Restore default setting i e file check every 24 hours Return to previous menu Adjust display as from SW 5 6 for service only Return to previous menu DR DOS shell For service task only password prote...

Page 118: ...can exist side by side in the language directory On POWER OFF and ON only the file with the name UMS can be loaded from the current language direc tory set language to the NCK An exact description of the operating sequences for loading data from an external data storage device is to be found in the Operator s Guide Up to SW 3 Up to SW 3 the customer UMS is enabled with an entry ASMLEN in the CON F...

Page 119: ... for the NCK can be saved to hard disk or loaded from the hard disk into the NCK memory It is also possible to edit them in the ASCII editor S NC machine data TEA1 S Cycle machine data TEA4 S Setting data SEA S Cycle setting data SEA4 S R parameters RPA S Zero offsets ZOA S Tool offsets TOA The correct sequence of operation is described in the Operator s Guide up to SW2 S Selecting NC data Diagnos...

Page 120: ...EDIT LOAD DIAGNOSIS Fig 4 23 You can only save edit and load in the user branch This function is password protected The data are loaded from the NCK CPU to the hard disk Press the softkey SAVE to obtain the following screen form You select the desire file by moving the cur sor keys and the INPUT key 14 27 Start up Save NC data MACHINE PARAMETER PROGRAMM SERVICES START DIAGNOSIS Fig 4 24 Press the ...

Page 121: ...ta selected into the NCK CPU The pass word must have been entered in the NCK area The following dialog text appears during data transmission Transmission from PC to NC active MACHINE PARAMETER PROGRAMM SERVICES 14 45 Start up SIEMENS NC data Start up User NC data NC Name Length Date NC data Name Length Date TEA1 96145 02 17 1993 13 21 22 SEA1 96145 02 18 1992 08 06 36 SEA1 10440 02 17 1993 13 21 4...

Page 122: ...agement area you can save PCF files or PLC machine data on the hard disk or load them from the hard disk into the NCK me mory You can also edit them in the USER branch S PCF files PCF S PLC machine data TEA2 Selecting PLC data Diagnosis PLC data management Press the softkeys DIAGNOSIS and PLC DATA management to obtain the basic display for PLC data Operation continues as described in section NC da...

Page 123: ...DER 0 03 12 1993 11 10 34 PCF11 0 03 12 1993 11 02 14 TUER1 0 03 12 1993 11 05 08 Start up SIEMENS PLC data PLC data DEUTSCH ENGLISCH ESPANOL FRANCAIS ITALIANO TEA2 12258 03 09 1993 15 46 08 Start up SIEMENS PLC data 11 33 MACHINE PARAMETER PROGRAMM SERVICES SAVE EDIT LOAD DIAGNOSIS Fig 4 26 PCF files in the directory DEUTSCH in the range DIAGNOSIS If no PCF files yet exist in the language directo...

Page 124: ...have been stored under the selected language is dis played Creating a new file Press softkey NEW You can then enter any name maximum 8 characters in the input field The input is accepted with INPUT and OK If the PCF file is to be loaded into the NCK memory or run up according to the entry in the KONFIG file language then the identifier PCF must be used If PCF is not used as the identifier this fil...

Page 125: ...t field When you press the softkey OK the PCF file is loaded into the NCK memory If a file with this identifier already exists the following message appears PLC error texts exist Overwrite You overwrite the file by acknowledging with the OK softkey Editing the PCF files Press the area switchover key Select DIAGNOSIS area Press the PLC DATA MANAGEMENT softkey Switch to the user branch with the HOME...

Page 126: ...ing you must load the crea ted PCF file from the NCK memory in the DIAGNOSIS area to the hard disk as data are lost when the control is switche doff Saving the PCF file Enter passwords in the NCK and MMC area Select the DIAGNOSIS START UP PLC DATA area with the cursor and the input key and keep pressing the keys until you reach the directory of language files select and accept the required languag...

Page 127: ...a Spindle data Scale General bits Axial bits Cycle data MACHINE PARAMETER PROGRAMM SERVICES DIAGNOSIS Fig 4 28 SW 1 Example PCF file 1 2 30 1 2 453 3 6 70 1 2 53 0 1 268 3 4 3 6 0 1 9 2 3 3 80 2 6 3 7770 2 3 0 2 3 5 3 8 0 2 43 7770 2 3 0 SAVE 09 22 Start up Edit PLC data Insert overwrite Cut to clipboard Copy to clipboard Search Paste from clipboard Undo PCF1 MACHINE PARAMETER PROGRAMM SERVICES DI...

Page 128: ...ard Operator panel Function Home POS1 Home key End End key Backspace key DELETE Delete key Return key ESC Escape key INSERT Insert key PageUp PageUp key PageDown PageDown key F3 F9 Softkey 1 to 7 below Selection of menu points below Shift F3 F9 Softkey 1 to 7 right Selection of menu points right Shift F1 Call up help screen F11 Area switchover key F12 Channel and mode group switchover END OF SECTI...

Page 129: ... individually it is also possible to load complete MD records and to save data that already exist A data management system has been implemented for organizing the different machine data records Machine data can be processed online data sets in the machine and offline machine data file You can select the Machine Data Dialog by pressing the softkeys Diagnosis Start up Machine data Machine data The M...

Page 130: ...ay fields is determined by the following machine data Spindles S Function The display text Spindle or Following spindle appears when NC MD 5210 7 ff spindle available and or NC MD 5250 0 is set S Setpoint The connection location of the setpoint appears in this window when NC MD 4600 6 7 ff drive measuring circuit module number is set For analog drives MS x x and digital drives DIG x x or MSD x S A...

Page 131: ...t appears in this window when NC MD 3840 6 7 ff drive measuring circuit module number has been set For analog drives MC x x Measuring circuit in measuring circuit modules and digital drives DIG x x or FDD x S Actual value 1 The connection value of actual value 1 appears in this window when NC MD 2000 6 7 ff drive measuring circuit module number has been set For analog drives MC x x Measuring circu...

Page 132: ...t column Input Text or data number without and You cannot search for the bit or parameter set in SW 3 In SW 4 it is possible to search for the bit parameter set or select a digit You can use the wildcard character for symbols or characters used in foreign languages which are not on the operator panel Password SW 3 and higher You select the function Password with this softkey Explanation The passwo...

Page 133: ...s using the hardkeys increment and decrement Operate SW 3 and higher the End hardkey to find out which changes can be made Under possible inputs you will find the next value in the and direction function SW 3 and higher You can select the available configured drives axes spindles channels and numbers e g IKA using the function Calculating controller data SW 4 and higher Press this softkey to selec...

Page 134: ...angeover speed MSD AM MSD only when MD 1011 5 1 MD 1608 Fixed temperature MSD only when MD 1011 5 1 v f operation MD 1127 Voltage with f 0 V F mode MSD Please note that any controller data entered manually will be overwritten when softkey Calculate controller data is pressed Selecting displayed data in header SW 4 and higher You select the displayed parameter number top left for position control r...

Page 135: ...y possible to select the axis with the softkeys Axis and Softkey axis Axis but also with the toggle key or with or Softkey You can return to the previous display with the vertical softkey Softkey perform With the vertical softkey Perform drift compensation it is possible to initiate I drift comp code 419 This performs a drift compensation for the axis currently selected The following errors can oc...

Page 136: ...revious axis display with the vertical softkey Softkey single axis The vertical softkey single axis is used to return the single axis display to in crease the refresh rate Service displays for A spindle service display that works on the same principle has been set up and spindles can be accessed via the top vertical softkey The spindle service display is similar to the axis service display with th...

Page 137: ...machine data is displayed when you press the info key Copy spindle Insert spindle Copy axis Insert axis Fig 5 5 Explanation In this display you enter the current assignments mode group name axis type exists for channel spindle and axis number The contents of the display fields show the settings of the following machine data Channel S Mode group The assignment of mode group to channel is determined...

Page 138: ...15 A A15 B B15 C C15 U U15 V V15 W W15 Q Q15 E E15 S Available The axis is displayed as existing when NC MD 5640 7 ff axis exists is set S Axis type The display tells you whether the axis is real or fictitious as set in NC MD 5640 6 ff real Input No fictitious Input Yes S Rotary axis The display tells you whether the axis is a linear or rotary axis as set in NC MD 5640 5 ff linear Input No rotary ...

Page 139: ...eometry MD Coupl axis combin Coord transform Override File functions Tool offset Basic MD Auxiliary functions Multichannel display Gen reset G groups File functions File functions LEC Basic MD Monitoring limitation Velocities Controller data Meas sys data Basic MD Monitoring limitation Rotational speeds Controller data Meas sys data File functions GI spindle GI axis File functions File functions D...

Page 140: ...tains various coupled motion combination motion combination machine data Softkey Coordinate This softkey contains various coordinate transformation transformation machine data Softkey Override This softkey contains feedrate override and spindle override machine data Softkey This softkey contains various tool offset machine data Tool offset 3 NC MD Channel Softkey Basic MD This softkey contains var...

Page 141: ...y contains position controller oriented spindle stop M19 and as from SW 4 4 feedforward control machine data 6 NC MD gearbox interpolation Softkey GI axis This softkey contains controller parameter following axis traversing range following axis and setting gearbox interpolation machine data Softkey GI spindle This softkey contains controller parameters following axis traversing range following spi...

Page 142: ...611D No No MD 2000 1st measuring system con nection MC1 1 FDD1 1 MD 2000 2 3 Actual value of digital drive No Yes MD 2000 6 7 Drive measuring circuit mo dule number 1 1 MD 2000 4 5 Measuring circuit connection number 1 1 Example spindle MSD Setpoint actual val assign spindle 1 analog digital MD 4600 Setpoint output MC1 6 MSD1 0 MD 4600 2 3 Setpoint on digital drive No Yes MD 4600 6 7 Drive measuri...

Page 143: ...daptation Parameter Symbol NC MD axis spindle Meaning Position control resolution b 18000 0 3 5240 0 3 Internal computational resolution of control Pulse multiplication EXE 611D HMS f 11160 4580 Multiplier input Grating constant g 39120 Distance between marks on a linear scale Spindle pitch l 39120 Leadscrew pitch Measuring system reso lution m Maximum resolution of measuring system The value is u...

Page 144: ...t measuring system Grating constant g Pulse multiplication f Rotary axis example Information required m r x 360 degrees 4 x p x f Gearbox factor r depends on whether direct or indirect measuring sysem is used Pulses per revolution p Pulse multiplication f Note Additional information about measuring system adaptation is given in machine data NC MD 3640 Pulses var incremental weighting and NC MD 368...

Page 145: ...xt Insert from clipboard overwrite whole axis spindle drive then appears The data is transferred when you select softkey OK Copy axis Axis data blocks are copied and inserted in the same way as spindle data blocks Insert axis see above Select drive data You can go to the drive configuration display by selecting softkeys Diagnosis Startup Machine data and Drive MD When you select softkey Copy Inser...

Page 146: ...uration and PLC machine data appears on the screen when you press the info key Fig 5 6 Explanation In this display you configure the current assignments control panel available address TT machine etc for the 1st and 2nd machine control panel The con tents of the display fields show the settings in the following machine data 1st machine control panel MCP S Available The 1st machine control panel is...

Page 147: ...g in PLC MD 6067 4 configuration 2nd machine control panel TT machine determines whether the machine is a T or a TT machine double slide T machine Input No TT machine Input Yes S Direction key processing The setting in PLC MD 6067 5 processing of direction keys by user program determines whether the direction keys are processed by the PLC operating system or the user program PLC operating system I...

Page 148: ...unctions Spindle Edit list File functions Edit texts Basic data Maga zine 1 Maga zine 2 Maga zine 4 Maga zine 3 File functions Tool dialog code carr File functions System setting General functions Note A list of the individual PLC machine data areas is given on the following pages The machine data are grouped according to their functions within these areas The functions of the individual machine d...

Page 149: ... PLC MD User MD Softkey User MD This softkey contains user value and user bits machine data Softkey Edit list texts The User MD softkey offers facilities to the user for putting together machine data with his own list and texts in the PLC MD area This means that the user can see all the PLC machine data relevant to his needs at a glance The lists are created by pressing the Edit list softkey and t...

Page 150: ...ive modules for the FDD and MSD motors are entered and activated in this drive configuration display The drive number is assigned the same num ber as the module slot and the modules are selected using the Select module softkey This configuration must then be backed up in the boot file with Accept conf NCKP0 softkey Note When selecting the module please ensure that the order no taken from the selec...

Page 151: ...ng current Controller data setpoint filter limitation I component reference model speed control loop adaptation speed controller current controller speed torque feedforward control and RFG automatic control machine data Softkey This softkey contains status display current values drive servo status register Status data min max memory monitoring function I F mode dn dt monitoring and diagnostics ser...

Page 152: ...duced with SW 4 This means that during the first start up the memory capacity and requirement are selected via NC MD 60003 memory for drive SW MSD and NC MD 60004 memory for drive SW FDD by entering yes 194 Kbytes of memory are assigned to each function Standard start up Select the Drive MD area via the Diagnosis Start up Machine data softkeys You are now in the drive configuration screen The orde...

Page 153: ...boot data records for the FDD and MSD are backed up on the NCK hard disk only After start up the drives are ready for operation LED has gone out on the individual modules A drive that has already been installed can be reinstalled by deleting the boot data record delete boot drives using the file functions and then pressing the softkey NCK Power On Start up Loading a Load the user data record confi...

Page 154: ...lculated from the rating plate data With the function Calculate controller data the controller data are calculated from the equivalent circuit diagram data An exact adaptation of the data to the ma chine requirements can then be made manually Data loss The configuration data drives and MD drives are changed in the non back up DRAM i e the data are lost if the power supply fails Saving data Save th...

Page 155: ...an be assigned the required machine data via the Cycles MD softkey In this area you will find central and channel dependent cycle machine data The Central cycles MD are divided up into memory groups for measuring elements measuring element data control bit user data and user bits The Channel dependent cycles MD are divided into values for measuring cycles control bits for measuring cycles user dat...

Page 156: ...and measuring system to compensate for errors The IKA data interpolation compensation with tables are used for the following complex functions S Compensation function Leadscrew error compensation and sag S Interpolation function Table controlled geometry and velocity profile SW 4 and higher Note A list of the individual IKA data areas is given below The IKA data T parame ters are grouped together ...

Page 157: ...tion configuration Softkey With this softkey it is possible to input different curves with a start and end pointer IKA curve pointer which can then be calculated by pressing the Calculate curve softkey Softkey IKA points With this softkey it is possible to enter points the intermediate points of the input variable with its assigned interpolation values in order to determine the output variable 5 M...

Page 158: ...reen Fig 5 10 Explanation The user can configure his own lists of machine data in the NC data NC axis NC spindle PLC data Drive FDD and Drive MSD areas which are accessed by operating the User displays softkey This means that the user can look at all the machine data of the individual areas that are important to him at a single glance The lists can be configured under the Edit list softkey 5 Machi...

Page 159: ...A3 must not be altered a 8 axis specific additional possibilities n General NC MD k Channel c s Spindle vsa Digital feed drive fdd hsa Digital main spindle drive msd Parameters that N9 T35 V12 U10 Column widths can be changed for display layout Date number N 9 Text T 35 Value V 12 Unit U 10 Explanation The machine data to be displayed must first be entered in the correct list axis specific spindle...

Page 160: ... H No e g H0 8 you insert a space line List of header With the softkey VIEW ONLY under SERVICES DATA MANAGEMENT and texts H the paths SIEMENS list module TEA1 ENGLISH tea1head SIEMENS list module TEA2 ENGLISH tea2head SIEMENS list module TEA3 ENGLISH tea3head you can view and select one of the existing header texts Please refer to the OEM User Documentation for infor mation on configuring customer...

Page 161: ...ters on the first level The steps required to load the files containing the drive data Accept config NCKP0 and Accept all NCKP0 are executed automatically Such a file must therefore always contain a complete drive file configuration drive When the drive files are being loaded the display jumps back to the basic display JOG after the configuration has been automatically saved and NCK Power On The m...

Page 162: ...ve machine data TEA3 Axis FDD Spindle MSD File functions NC machine data TEA1 General NC MD Geometry motion Channel Axis Spindle Gearbox interpol File functions Memory config PLC machine data TEA2 I O device setting Alarms messages PLC basic data User MD Tool manage ment Computer link File functions Cycle machine data TEA4 Central cycle MD Chan dep cycle MD File functions Interpolation compensatio...

Page 163: ...Coupled axis comb Coordin transform Override Tool offset File functions Channel TEA1 Channel basic MD Auxiliary functions Multichan nel display Gen reset G groups File functions Axis TEA1 Basic MD Monitoring limitation Velocities Meas sys data Controller data Leadscrew error comp File functions Spindle TEA1 Spindle basic MD Monitoring limitation Speeds Meas sys data Controller data File functions ...

Page 164: ...ycle MD TEA4 Chan dep cycle MD File functions IKA configuration IKA1 IKA con figuration File functions IKA compensation points IKA2 IKA comp points File functions IKA error points IKA3 IKA error points File functions Explanation On the 3rd level it is possible to select individual parts of a data record If data is saved into an existing file only the data referring to the contents of the display a...

Page 165: ...ou are prompted to enter a name Select a file that already exists from the manufacturer Siemens or user field Only the BOOT file cannot be selected It is a special file required for the drive installation The selected file is displayed in the data record field in the configuration display Files already existing can be deleted together with their contents in the display field First select the file ...

Page 166: ...ed into the NCK The on line file and the BOOT file cannot be loaded Note If the file functions are selected after an NCK Power On the password has to be entered again 5 8 4 2 2nd level File functions Selection Example drive MD Diagnosis Machine data Start up Drive MD Axis FDD Spindle MSD File functions Explanation Press the Diagnosis Start up Machine data Drive MD e g and File functions softkeys t...

Page 167: ...key you can choose between Conf 8 drive configu ration only and All With the Load from disk softkey you can choose between Conf 8 drive config uration only and Drives 8 drive MD without configuration i e loading of a TEA3 file drive in the 2nd level is always carried out in 2 stages see drive installation start up 5 Machine Data Dialog MDD as from SW 3 5 8 4 File functions sequence of operation as...

Page 168: ...ns Explanation Press the Diagnosis Start up Machine data Drive MD e g Axis FDD and File functions softkeys to call up the 3rd level file functions display Fig 5 15 Explanation The functions of the softkeys are the same as for the first level However the functions of the two softkeys Save and Load can be expanded 5 Machine Data Dialog MDD as from SW 3 5 8 4 File functions sequence of operation as f...

Page 169: ...e settings are as follows shaded field B Select axis Call file functions in Area Select All data with toggle key under Axis No enter number 5 Gen NC MD Geometry and motion Channel MD Axis MD Spindle MD 1 2 3 4 5 6 NC machine data structure ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉ ÉÉ Axis chan Spindle No B A Basic MD Monitor Limitation Velocities Leadscrew error compensation Controller data Measuring systems Explanati...

Page 170: ...dule 1 MSD module Module slots Slot 1 MSD module Installation location Slot 2 free Slot 3 free Slot 4 2 axis FDD module Slot 6 1 axis FDD module Entering the Set the configuration from the specified values in the configuration display Select drive configuration the actual module type using the Select module softkey Confirm these settings with the Accept Conf NCKP0 softkey Fig 5 16 5 Machine Data D...

Page 171: ...o make the motor selection Select the actual motor type with the Enter motor softkey Once you have selec ted all the motors confirm these settings with the Accept all NCKP0 softkey in the previous display Fig 5 17 Note Please make sure that you enter the NC MD S MD 3840 MD 2000 FDD S MD 4600 MD 4000 MSD correctly assign 5 Machine Data Dialog MDD as from SW 3 5 9 1 Standard installation of digital ...

Page 172: ...onfiguration drive configuration display Select the actual module type with Select module softkey Confirm these settings with the Accept Conf NCKP0 softkey Fig 5 18 Motor selection Select the actual motor type with the Enter motor softkey Confirm this setting with the Accept all NCKP0 softkey Notes Please make sure that you enter NC MD 3840 and 2000 correctly assign The drive numbers of drives alr...

Page 173: ... with the Accept Conf NCKP0 softkey Now enter the actual 2 axis FDD module 9 18 A for slot 2 with the Select mod ule softkey If no motor exists for the 3rd slot switch it to passive Again confirm this setting with the Accept Conf NCKP0 softkey Fig 5 19 Motor selection Select the actual motor with the Enter motor softkey Confirm this setting with only for new motor type the Accept all NCKP0 softkey...

Page 174: ...key drive configuration Confirm this setting with softkey Accept Conf NCKP0 Now enter the actual 2 axis FDD module 18 36 A for the correct slot using soft key Select module Again confirm this setting with the Accept Conf NCKP0 softkey Fig 5 20 Motor selection Select the current motors with the Enter motor softkey Confirm the settings with the Accept Conf NCKP0 softkey Note Please make sure that yo...

Page 175: ...ted from the bus temporarily Procedure Switch the axis from the active to the passive state in the drive configuration display Confirm this setting with the Accept Conf NCKP0 softkey You return to the previous state by switching the axis back to active and confir ming this setting with the Accept Conf NCKP0 softkey Fig 5 21 5 Machine Data Dialog MDD as from SW 3 5 9 5 Drive active or passive as fr...

Page 176: ...l The same drive module is used Procedure Operate the Enter motor softkey in the Motor PS data display Select the type of motor you want If you are using a motor made by a different manufacturer you must adapt the motor data from a data sheet Confirm this setting with the Ac cept Conf NCKP0 softkey Fig 5 22 5 Machine Data Dialog MDD as from SW 3 5 9 6 Using a new motor type as from SW 3 ...

Page 177: ...appears in which you enter the existing TEA3 files together with the file names and then select the Config area with the toggle key Operate the Load start softkey The data are loaded into the drive Confirm these settings with the Accept conf NCKP0 softkey Fig 5 23 Procedure 1 Again select the drive configuration display and the File functions softkey Using 2nd method the Load from disk softkey loa...

Page 178: ...guration as from SW 3 Notes If one of the 1 axis modules in the grouping is faulty and is to be replaced by a 2 axis module it is possible that a display line for the 2nd axis does not exist in the drive configuration display You must therefore move the following modules on by 1 slot However it is important that you keep the drive number The advan tage of this is that you will not have to reload t...

Page 179: ...y They contain one text for each data which can consist of several lines Explanation The list module looks in these lists for all information regarding display structure and the data to be displayed and stores them in a compressed file binary file If this file already exists it is accessed as soon as the list display is called up i e the ASCII lists are not used The list module first looks for the...

Page 180: ...data lists contain the data to be displayed in each display The file names are such that the contents of the lists can be recognized from the name Examples nc 1 1 103 1st softkey Basic data 3rd level 1st softkey General NC MD 2nd level NC MD 1st level an 5 6 103 6th softkey Status data 3rd level 5th softkey MSD 2nd level Drive data 1st level The file contents of 42 103 for example are structured a...

Page 181: ... Treatment is interpreted as follows 00 1 1 representation 05 bzw 07 special treatment or representation 0 0625 5 2 2 Unit no the units are in text list tea1unit 106 5 places of which 2 are behind the decimal point Factor for display List contents Info lists Explanations for all the data that appear in the information display key can be stored in the information lists Example 2040 This data is not...

Page 182: ...le line is enough 2007 L 00 1 99 All other information is then taken from the Siemens file 4 All the changes have now been made When the display PLC MD Tool mana gement Magazine 1 is next called up the message 106001 List display User TEA2 Data lists plc52 is being generated will appear and the chan ges stored in a compressed binary file 5 Subsequent changes could be any of the following a Data li...

Page 183: ...m log 1 it is possible to find out whether the message has already been issued It is thus possible in the cases mentioned above to check whether an alteration has been included for the display generation 5 10 3 Configuring the parameter set switchover in the list display Introduction Three parameter set groups are supported by SW 4 and higher 1 Parameter set position control G1 2 Parameter set spe...

Page 184: ...parameter set group Example G1 2040 15400 15440 15480 15520 15560 15600 15640 As a result of these 8 data only the one belonging to the active parameter set of the group Position control is displayed The arrangement one above the other next to one another is irrelevant The abbreviated notation used in the past can be used in the brackets Example G3 1500 1 8 Displaying the current Definition of ter...

Page 185: ...lecting the It is possible to jump to the parameter set number in the same way as to the parameter set parameter number using the key combination shift home shift key and left diagonal up arrowkey new as from SW 4 Here a number can be entered directly or the toggle key can be used to switch to the next value The arrow keys can be used to jump between several input fields in the headline e g parame...

Page 186: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a NC start up 1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a NC MD a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 187: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 188: ...e 1 to 6 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Channel 1 to 4 1 a a a a a ...

Page 189: ...makes it possible for the user to abort channel specific processing via his PLC user program without affecting processing in other channels in the mode group Mode group and DRF selection are still only possible in the master channel of the mode group Effects of a reset command via the PLC in a specific channel Processing in the channel is aborted Any active channel specific reset alarms such as fo...

Page 190: ...Axial bits 1 6 6 4 6000 to 6999 Leadscrew error compensation bits Compensations flags 6 6 5 9000 to 9299 Channel specific MD bits 2 Channel bits 2 6 6 6 11000 to 17969 Axis specific MD 2 Axial data 2 6 7 18000 to 18599 Axis specific MD bits 2 Axial bits 2 6 7 1 20400 to 20449 MD for multi channel display Channel memory 6 8 2400 to 3944 1 MD for parameter set switchover Dyn software limit switch Co...

Page 191: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Position of SW limit switch NC MD 2240 2371 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 192: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 193: ...l Braking step speed reduction per Ipo cycle FG62 Fact FG62 Fdecel where Fdecel is calculated from a acceleration see NC MD 276 tipo IPO cycle ms Fdecel a tipo x x 60 min m ms s2 No speed reduction takes place at the first block limit if F1 FG62 Fdecel No speed reduction to F3 takes place at the second block limit if F2 FG62 Fdecel FG62 values MD3 smaller than Fdecel are not sensible 6 8 Siemens A...

Page 194: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 195: ...the difference exceeds the upper limit defined above the block is not cleared for processing and alarm 2048 circle end position error is displayed If the difference is less than but not equal to zero the circle centre parameters are corrected as it is then assumed that the end position has been correctly programmed The circle is then traversed on the basis of the new centre point K2 A E Mp Mk Prog...

Page 196: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 197: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 198: ...meter TO Comments 10 204 409 Initial setting 11 186 372 12 170 341 13 157 315 14 146 292 15 136 273 16 128 256 17 120 240 18 113 227 19 107 215 20 102 204 21 97 195 22 93 186 23 89 178 24 85 170 25 81 163 26 78 157 27 75 151 28 73 146 29 70 141 30 68 136 31 66 132 32 64 128 16 K tool memory Basic version with 8 K tool memory Note carefully Modifications do not take effect until user memory has bee...

Page 199: ... 10 Active MD 18 is of significance in conjunction with Siemens cycle L960 only and may not be modified Basic angle for nutating head 20 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 180 000 10 3 deg Active in n block Please observe NC MD 5010 5D tool length compensation Number of buffer pairs CP 315 1 24 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 16 1 16 Active on Power...

Page 200: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Block pointer for reading in a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 201: ...s 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 the remaining NC MD NC MD 122 to 130 are set to zero Positions 1 to 16 of the spindle override switch 131 146 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units see below 50 150 Active see below Active when all channels of the mode group are in STOP status Percentages may be assigned as needed to the max 16 spindle override s...

Page 202: ...e 156 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 200 0 1 000 ms Active on Power On The enable signal for the speed controller servo enable on the measuring circuit is removed when the programmed delay time has elapsed There is a separate servo enable signal on the measuring circuit for each axis the control supplies these signals on a mode group basis The programmed delay time has the...

Page 203: ...ERIK 840C has been designed so that the operator can specify the ratio of interpolation to position control sampling interval MD 155 The interpolation time is the product obtained by multiplying the contents of MD160 with the contents of MD155 See Section Axis Analog and Spindle Installation Number of IKA configurations via PLC DB48 161 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 3...

Page 204: ...king the larger value of 2 ms for a large number of axes Maximum tool wear P7 209 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 999 999 1 999 999 999 999 99 as from SW 4 0 00001 Active at once Maximum tool wear P5 P6 208 Active at once NC MD 208 and 209 can be used to restrict the maximum value in the tool offset wear memory Specification of 999 999 limits the maximum entry in tool wear ...

Page 205: ...king the Overall Reset mode refer to Section General Reset Initial D no for TO area 2 212 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units see below 1 809 Active same as MD 210 Initial D no for TO area 1 211 Active same as MD 210 Initial D no for TO area 3 213 Active same as MD 210 Initial D no for TO area 4 214 Active same as MD 210 Default value 211 1 212 213 214 0 The data location numbe...

Page 206: ... 228 Active see below User menu for TEACH IN 230 Active see below User menu for AUTOMATIC 231 Active see below User menu for JOG REFPOINT 232 Active see below If a mode is selected and the standard system basic menu for this mode does not appear on the screen it is possible to define any user menu as the new basic menu for this mode by entering the user menu number If value 0 is entered the standa...

Page 207: ... French English Italian English Spanish You can check which combination has been ordered and implemented via the Control info softkey M function C axis on 260 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 1 9 999 1 Active on NC Stop M function C axis off 261 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 1 9 999 Active on NC Stop Active when all channels of the mode group ar...

Page 208: ... 1 310 Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 91 92 93 and 94 999 as from SW 4 Active on Power On Output byte to MIXED I O 311 Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 11 12 or 21 22 999 as from SW 4 Active on Power On With NC MD 310 and 311 the cam signals can be assigned to an output byte of a certain HW MIXED I O Enter either 11 or 91 if using the 1st output byte of the 1st MIXED I ...

Page 209: ...first mode group MD 323 Mixed I O assignment for sixth mode group The first decimal place units defines the input byte of the module Mixed I O 1 2 CSB 1 PLC 1 4 The second decimal place tens defines the number of the mixed I O module Mixed I O 1 2 CSB 8 PLC 9 Module identifier 8 stands for the CSB board number of inputs is limited to 6 right justified in input byte Active On Power On Time for inte...

Page 210: ...rred to spindle actual value SW 5 and higher 333 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 550 0 16 000 in of the IPO cycle Active on NC Stop Deadtime compensation for dwell referred to spindle setpoint SW 5 and higher 334 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 450 0 16 000 in of the IPO cycle Active on NC Stop With the Dwell referred to an axis G24 a time correspond...

Page 211: ...O Active on at once The velocity increase factor is the value in percent per IP cycle by which the reduction factor is again increased to 100 after failure to reach the hysteresis threshold of the following axis velocity 2nd MCS offset in X coordinates as from SW 6 337 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 99 999 999 MS POWER ON Note For further information see description of...

Page 212: ...n monitoring 3rd MCS offset in Z coordinates as from SW 6 342 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 MS POWER ON Note For further information see description of the function collision monitoring 4th MCS offset in X coordinates as from SW 6 343 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 99 999 999 POWER ON Note For further information see description of the fun...

Page 213: ...99 999 999 units IS Active on Power On 6th transformation parameters 1 to 10 780 789 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 99 999 999 99 999 999 units IS Active on Power On 7th transformation parameters 1 to 10 790 799 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 99 999 999 99 999 999 units IS Active on Power On 8th transformation parameters 1 to 10 800 809 Default...

Page 214: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Coupled axis a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Leading axis a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Coupled axis a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Leading axis a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a NC MD a a a a a a ...

Page 215: ...ng observe also NC MD 5156 to 5188 Coupled axis Leading axis Coupled axis Leading axis Coupled axis Leading axis Coupled axis Leading axis 883 882 881 880 879 878 877 876 0 0 0 0 3 2 2 1 NC MD not possible i The leading axis of a coupled axis grouping can also be the coupled axis of another grouping observe also NC MD 5156 to 5183 j A leading axis cannot couple itself Coupled axis Leading axis Cou...

Page 216: ...red in NC MD 104 The maximum value must accord with NC MD 210 A TO area must be allocated to each channel Also refer to NC MD 210 to 214 No of the enabled program 106 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 see below see below Active in next block If 0 is entered all programs are enabled in the first processing level for this channel The program number must be entered if only a p...

Page 217: ... 108 to 122 for the relevant G group The reset state for G group 9 G70 G71 is defined together with the input resolution in NC MD 5002 Default value T M G group 108 1 1 1 110 18 17 3 112 54 54 6 114 64 60 8 116 0 0 9 118 95 94 12 120 150 150 15 122 450 450 1 25 Table of input values Internal G group G functions 0 00 MD 01 M T MD 10 MD 11 MD 02 MD 03 MD 33 MD 34 MD 35 MD 06 MD 12 MD 13 MD 36 MD 1 0...

Page 218: ...ta can be read into the NCK circular buffer Execution from external from the hard disk and via the computer link file transfer The device with which the data transfer is executed is defined in the machine data channel specific 130 and 132 The following settings are possible Device type for Execution from external 130 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 5 Active NC MD 130 de...

Page 219: ... functions like ELG IKA and emergency retraction initial settings of machine data G16 plane etc To simplify the handling for the programmer in such cases the NC can execute a program start cycle cycle with channel specific default settings immediately after the selected program is started before the first block in this program is executed An end cycle e g deselection of the preset functions is exe...

Page 220: ...142 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 819 Active on Power On Corner deceleration speed with G620 G00 as from SW 5 146 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 100 000 1 000 units min Active on Corner deceleration speed with G62 not including G36 as from SW 5 148 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 100 000 1 000 units min Active o...

Page 221: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 3 2 1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Submodule slot 2 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 222: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Axis number of servo loop module entered by the control Example for structure of a value in MD 200 Digit No 1 0 Local axis number The control automatically enters the local number of the axis here Digit No 3 2 Code digital drive Code 10 15 assigns the address to 611 D 611 D ser...

Page 223: ...Block ahead of which only auxiliary functions have been programmed Single block without G60 G09 Jog Incremental feed End of program Note The coarse stop tolerance range is not approached in continuous path operation G64 exception G00 G64 coarse exact stop There is no secondary error as a result of a large number of consecutive positioning operations as position control is not deactivated by the st...

Page 224: ...its Setpoint position Actual value Axis not marked with has reached its position Actual value Axes marked with are not in position Actual value Axes marked with are not in position The fine exact stop limits operate for G09 G60 Block before G33 and G63 Note In continuous path operation G64 neither the coarse nor the fine exact stop tolerance range is approached exception G00 Actual values are mark...

Page 225: ...position monitor NC MD 156 NC MD 372 has elapsed alarm 112 is issued The following situations may occur a If the interface controller revokes the servo enable signal for an axis the NC can no longer hold that axis in position The interface controller must hold the axis in position itself by means of clamping However the clamped axis may be forced out of position as a result of mechanical forces b ...

Page 226: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Encoder The compensation...

Page 227: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Software limit switch 2 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 228: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 229: ...sitive direction If the entry in NC MD 244 is negative the axis after overrunning the zero mark travels to the value represented by the difference between 2000 units and the input value In the event of a reference point shift of more than approximately 2000 units the axis reverses its direction of travel backlash on reversal Reference point pulse zero marker from encoder a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 230: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 244 0 e g 1000 units MD 244 Ref point Velocity Ref cam Ref point pulse Path 2000 units V S a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 231: ... to interpolate and perform a machining operation together must exhibit precisely the same gain in the position control loop i e at the same speed they must exhibit the same following error 45 degree inclination Any deviations will result in contouring errors Only axes which never contribute to continuous path operation may be defined with different values The actual KV factor can be checked on th...

Page 232: ...ommended as different input values would be obtained for the various axes despite identical gain in the position control loop Where Umax is the speed setpoint voltage at maximum motor speed Multgain Umax mV If problems of precision or restrictions caused by input limits occur the factors between MD 256 and 260 can be reduced or increased See Section entitled Axis Analog and Spindle Installation Se...

Page 233: ...um speed 9 5 V setpoint speed See also Section entitled Axis Analog and Spindle Installation Drift compensation 272 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 1 0 2 500 500 500 500 VELO 1 0 01 of max motor speed 2 Active on NC Stop The temperature drift in analog electronic components primarily in the motor control unit causes the axes to wander from their set position until the fol...

Page 234: ...fore be as low as possible When an alarm is triggered the relevant axis is decelerated as quickly as possible also refer to the descriptions of the various alarms Note Values of approximately 50 to 150 0 5 to 1 5 m s2 are customary for standard machines NC MD 276 must specify the angular acceleration in the case of rotary axes Calculation of the permissible acceleration G36 C axis mode The set acc...

Page 235: ...t limit Upper input limit Units 300 0 99 999 999 1 000 units min IS Active for all channels of mode group in STOP MD 284 is accepted when all channels of the mode group are in STOP and applies from the next reference point approach During approach to the reference point the cutoff speed takes effect as soon as the reducing cam is reached i e the Deceleration signal is active see NC MD 244 In the c...

Page 236: ...nce for the operator s response time Ref point approach speed 296 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 10 000 0 99 999 999 1 000 units min IS Active on NC Stop If the Direction key leading to the reference point is depressed in Reference point approach mode the axis accelerates to the reference point approach speed Exception The axis is already at the deceleration cam or automat...

Page 237: ...must be assigned an interpolation parameter 0 No interpolation parameter 1 Interpolation parameter I 2 Interpolation parameter J 3 Interpolation parameter K Standard MD X axis I Y axis J Z axis K Several axes may have the same interpolator name Programming when using identical parameter names Assignment 1st parameter for 1st programmed axis 2nd parameter for 2nd programmed axis G2 X5 C10 J20 J20 L...

Page 238: ...rward control this value is fed directly to the position controller input while for dynamic feedforward control it is fed to the position controller input using a first order time delay element after a delay specified in machine data 392 No feedforward control is applied to the associated axis if feedforward factor 0 is entered in 312 Option 6FC5 150 0AS03 0AA0 must be set to activate feedforward ...

Page 239: ... input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 100 units MS Active on Power On The compensation value depends on the permissible tolerance band for the axis position The value for the tolerance band or a slightly lower value is entered in order to make use of the full bandwidth for each compensation procedure also see Section entitled Functional Descriptions for details on leadscrew error compensation T...

Page 240: ... are provided for details on leadscrew error compensation see Section entitled Functional Descriptions IKA warning limit as from SW 3 356 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 9999 9999 9999 9999 units MS Active at once If the set warning limit is exceeded interface signal DB 32 DR K bit 5 is set Mode group 360 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 1 1 2 6 as ...

Page 241: ...e The number of pulses of the encoder and the appropriate distance to go on the machine must be known for determining machine data 364 and 368 The following formula represents the relation between these machine data Position control resolution MD 368 Measuring system resolution MD 364 Schematic block diagram of the position control parameters Comput resoln Actual value adjustment Meas system resol...

Page 242: ...er revolution p Number of pulses per revolution of the ROD encoder 1 Transmission ratio of mechanical gearing r Transmission ratio of a mechanical gearing which may be present between motor and ROD encoder Factor for position control pulses u 364 Evaluation of position control resolution Factor for actual value pulses v 368 Evaluation of measuring system resolution The relation may be formulated a...

Page 243: ... 6 inch 0 5 10 3 mm 5 08 1 mm inch ˆ Example p 18000 f 5 b 0 5 10 3 degrees m 0 001 degrees 360 degrees 18000 5 4 v u m b 1 10 3 degr 0 5 10 3 degr A linear scale with EXE is used m g 4f Example g 0 02 mm f 10 b 0 5 10 3 mm m 0 0005 mm MD368 1 MD364 1 0 02 mm 40 0 5 10 3 mm 0 5 10 3 mm v u m b 1 1 Calculation factor inch mm 10 4 inch 2 10 5 inch 10 2 5 1 10 2 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 244: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 3640 1024 MD 3680 625 MD 11160 4 Rotary axis with SIMODRIVE 611 D b 0 5 x 10 3 degrees l 360 degrees p 2048 pulses rev Motor measuring system v 1 x 1 f SW EXE m 0 x 5 x 10 3 degrees desired m l 4 x p x f 8192 5625 f l 4 x p x m a a a a a a a a a a a a 360 4 x 2048 x 0 5 x 10 3 mm a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 245: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Normal case S MD 212 MD 372 Time S S MD 212 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 246: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 247: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Code digital drive Digit No 3 2 Code digital drive Code 10 15 assigns the address to 611 D 611 D servo loop or digital setpoint channel Codes 1 9 11 15 are reserved for expansions in the future and are interpreted as for 00 or 10 The code must...

Page 248: ...erpreted as weighting factor 1 so that the programmed path and the path to be traversed are identical The weighting factor of the axis concerned is multiplied by the programmed path to produce the path to be traversed Conditions a All other NC MD in units IS must be entered in the programmed system X b All other NC MD in units MS must be entered in the refined system X c The actual value display e...

Page 249: ...rise time of drive As from SW 4 for 8 parameter sets Absolute offset 396 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 99 999 999 99 999 999 units IS Active on Power On Active after POWER ON The offset is calculated automatically on reference point approach SIPOS ENDAT or can be entered manually without a reference point approach SIPOS ENDAT distance coding NC machine data bits 1808 bi...

Page 250: ...t Units 0 2 0 3 500 500 500 500 VELO 2 0 01 of max motor speed 3 Active at once The input value must be modified in the appropriate direction until the spindle exhibits identical actual speeds in both directions of rotation The value must be adjusted at low speeds and can be checked by viewing the appropriate information in the Basic display in the service display for spindles spindles with encode...

Page 251: ...ery fine adjustment of the set speed ratio e g to the speed ratios of belt drives which are not always precisely known Minimum speed gear stages 1 8 411 418 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units see table 0 99 999 rev min 1 Active on NC Stop Assignment Gear 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NC MD 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 Default 50 500 1000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 By entering the minimum g...

Page 252: ...provides the setpoint for acceleration in the form of a ramp that is based on the contents of these MD The MD thus act as variable ramp function generators They are set by measuring the interval from zero speed to maximum speed for each gear NC MD 419 426 can be set to zero when the drive actuator is equipped with an integrated ramp function generator Notes There are two acceleration time constant...

Page 253: ...s to continue until positioning on the basis of the specified position control characteristic gain factor and acceleration time constant has been completed see also Section Axis Analog and Spindle Installation Assignments Gear 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NC MD 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 The creep speed is the limit beyond which no acceleration takes place When positioning from zero speed acceleration tak...

Page 254: ...n prematurely The position control for the spindle remains active until the Acknowledge M19 signal DB31 DRK 2 has been generated or the Spindle controller enable signal is revoked For position control cancellation see also NC MD 520 bits 5 and 6 Position control is not cancelled by setting the Spindle stop signal see also Section entitled Axis Analog and Spindle Installation Note As from SW 4 for ...

Page 255: ...tting data item for spindle speed limit G26 S Monitoring is discontinued at 100 Zero speed tolerance 446 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100 0 16 000 10 000 as from SW 4 0 01 Active on NC Stop Unit 0 01 of the maximum gear speed The actual speed is measured in systems with analog spindle speed and spindle encoder A Spindle stationary signal DB31 DLk bit 3 informs the PLC wh...

Page 256: ...g to this spindle speed is output taking into account the gear just selected Spindle override is active Set oscillation speed 450 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 50 0 1 000 2 10 000 3 0 01 Active on NC Stop So that you can set the oscillation speed as finely as possible you enter it in 0 01 of the maximum motor speed i e 10000 previously 8192 is oscillation at maximum motor...

Page 257: ...6 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 5 625 0 65 000 9999 9999 as from SW 2 Active on Power On The internal calculations for the spindle are made in the resolution provided by the measuring system measuring system resolution In order to be able to carry out the internal conversions to the measuring system resolution the latter must be entered in MD 456 As for axes input is not ...

Page 258: ...d are greater than the input limits common factors must be reduced Recommendation Always reduce when possible at least for values 100 000 Notes The position control resolution has been set to 0 5 x 10 3 degrees for the spindle If the spindle is allocated to a C axis MD 461 the C axis resolution is used for the calculations MD 1800 364 368 The default values apply to the use of an SPC servo loop mo...

Page 259: ... a a a a a a a Measuring system a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 260: ...te Changes to MD 459 do not take effect until the spindle is resynchronized with the encoder When specifying a positive value in MD 459 the spindle angle zero position is offset in the direction which corresponds to clockwise rotation M03 If a C axis is assigned to the spindle axis MD 244 takes effect in C axis mode as soon as the C axis has been referenced 1 Example MD 4590 9 000 Zero mark offset...

Page 261: ...le Permissible values 04 to 06 for SPC servo loop modules 04 to 12 for HMS servo loop modules Note The value 00 00 00 00 for MD 460 is permissible only if the spindle does not exist for the control MD 521 bit 7 0 Setpoint output digital as from SW 3 460 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 15001000 up to SW 4 30001000 as from SW 5 Active on Power On Exact description see MD ...

Page 262: ...es from the encoder may be lost when the cutoff frequency is exceeded In this case actual value acquisition will not be correct The signal SPINDLE STOPPED must be evaluated by the drive The SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZED interface signal is cancelled In the case of a repeated drop below the critical frequency the spindle is automatically resynchronized with the encoder hysteresis characteristic Note If a se...

Page 263: ...ncreased by increasing the position control sampling interval Such increase will however impair the results produced by the controller See Axes for advantage The spindle specific position controller sampling interval TLS is TLS MD 155 MD 168 MD 466 Notes The position control sampling interval must be in an integer ratio to the selected inter polation clock pulse MD 155 If a C axis is assigned to t...

Page 264: ... input limit Units 0 1 16 000 Active on Power On In positioning mode the spindle must be under position control in its target position In order to ensure steady rest of the spindle even in the case of drift extremely low setpoint speeds with a very high resolution must be fed to the drive actuator via the analog interface With some drive actuators it is therefore possible to choose a different sca...

Page 265: ...re used for the open loop control mode the time constants with position controller for the position mode MD 478 to 485 must be set such that the motor can follow the specified setpoints at any one time without reaching the current limit Particular care should be taken be taken that this is also the case in the field weakening range The data in 478 to 485 should always be greater than the data in 4...

Page 266: ... In so doing a certain reserve 10 50 should be added to the measured value according to the expected load Time constant setpoint filter as from SW 2 486 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 55 0 1 000 16 000 as from SW 4 0 1 ms Active at once Active Immediately The feed forward control parameter Time constant setpoint filter is necessary in order to also enable all the functions...

Page 267: ...s only stored internally it cannot be looked at The value 16000 entered for the time constant is also automatically replaced by the value derived by the control Note As from SW 4 for 8 gear stages Tolerance range synchronism fine 1 491 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 40 0 16 000 99999999 SW5 4 and higher 1 unit MS Active on Reset Same description as for MD 492 Note As from ...

Page 268: ...494 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 90 0 100 Active on Reset Every spindle is limited to a maximum acceleration and a maximum speed NC MD 478 485 In addition in both cases the following spindle is checked against a warning threshold The warning threshold is defined in this machine data and applies to both the speed threshold and the acceleration threshold The warning thresh...

Page 269: ...f leading axis leading spindle are used for the compensatory control and monitoring 3 Setpoint position coupling with simulated actual values of the leading axis leading spindle the compensatory controller only reacts to following spindle or other leading axis leading spindle faults 4 Actual position coupling setpoint speed coupling 2 The machine data is used for two applications Application A gea...

Page 270: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 271: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 272: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 273: ...ameters are specified as absolutes the centre point of the circle refers to the centre point of the workpiece and not the starting point of the circular path of the circle G03 N4 N2 G02 Y 85 75 55 35 50 80 X a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a N3 If an interpolation parameter was not programmed because it was 0 the G function which also precedes the programmed interpolation parameter also re...

Page 274: ... block Example N1 G0 G90 X0 Y0 LF approach P1 N2 G11 X0 Y0 A30 B30 F500 LF define Pol1 and traverse to P2 N3 G91 A30 LF Pol1 is maintained exit P2 N4 A30 B40 LF Pol1 is maintained traverse to P3 N5 M30 LF traverse from P3 to P4 Y X 60 P1 Pol 1 N4 P3 P4 B30 B30 B40 N3 30 N2 P2 Bit 3 Bit 3 1 The old PRESET OFFSET is automatically retained following Power On and reference point approach Active NC Sto...

Page 275: ...a a a PLC cycle Bit 1 1 If the bit is set the internal WAIT mark synchronization is active Bit 1 0 WAIT mark synchronization via PLC Active NC STOP Note Observe the internal WAIT MARK SYNCHRONIZATION DB 10 15 DL 15 8 interface signal as from SW 6 3 Bit 0 1 No NC STOP in dwell block G04 S G14 G24 NC STOP is not active in these blocks but only at the end of the block Bit 0 0 NC STOP is immediately a...

Page 276: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 277: ...ts 2 and 1 are effective only when the standard display for tool offsets P0 9 is not modified in any way When configuring tool offsets the keyswitch group bits 5 to 7 for the data fields P0 to Pxy must also be configured via the NC workstation WS 800A Bits 1 and 2 can only be set together or not at all Active At once 5006 Axis spindle converter as from SW 2 ELG program ming via 1 input display PP ...

Page 278: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 279: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a new absolute entry of Y value Y 100 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 280: ...1 0 Bit 1 1 Bit 0 Run the length compensation even for non programmed axes 840C T If a modification of the tool length compensation e g deselection via D0 produces a traversing path in an axis that is not programmed in this block traversing is carried out nonetheless If this bit is not set traversing is carried out only if the axis has been programmed Programming example for the 840C T N5 G18 G0 X...

Page 281: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 282: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 283: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 284: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 285: ...point speed Note If the bit is set the exact stop limits are not taken into account on a block change This means that the existing path velocity is output to the axes of the next block If a servo enable has not been set for these axes alarm 168 Servo enable for traversing axis is output To avoid this Program G09 exact stop in the last G63 block Approach the same drilling axis position with G0 or G...

Page 286: ...ircles directly from the part drawing See Programming Guide Bit 5 Cycles This bit activates the reference conditioning software module which is essential for processing stock removal cycle L95 Bit 3 Extended contour definition programming This function can simplify NC programming You can enter the words to describe lines and circles directly from the drawing into the control See Programming Guide ...

Page 287: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 288: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 289: ...DB29 DR K 26 5 DL K 26 5 Monitoring for axes FA FS can also be switched on off from PLC If monitoring is switched off from PLC it is switched off for all channels Bit 2 0 Emergency retraction off G420 in current channel a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 290: ... The following axes go into controlled follow up Bit 0 Bit 0 1 Stopping is also performed with Emergency stop The following axes subsequently go into controlled follow up Bit 0 0 On Emergency stop deceleration with speed setpoint 0 is performed immediately Following axes go into controlled follow up a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 291: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No NC MD 5025 Reload workpiece on power on as from SW 2 Endlessly turning rotary axis Alarm Axis not in C axis mode Travel thru transform center as from SW 5 Extended threading package Axis specific G functions to PLC Bit 7 Bit 7 1 The last active workpiece is reloaded channel specifically in the...

Page 292: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 293: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 294: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 295: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 296: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a X1 0 00 X2 0 00 X3 0 00 X4 0 00 X5 0 00 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 297: ...function for Transmit G131 0001 0001 G231 0010 0001 G331 0011 0001 MD 5062 5069 Axis name according to code table see MD 568 The default values must be retained if Transformation option 6FC5 150 0AD04 0AA0 is not used Illegal MD results in alarm 3087 Active All Transmit MDs become active on Power On or on a warm restart For a detailed description see Section 13 4 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 298: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 299: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 300: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 301: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 302: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 303: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 304: ...4 886 888 890 892 894 896 898 Leading axis Coupl mot axis Definition of the coupled axis pairing 877 879 881 883 885 887 889 891 893 895 897 899 7 a 6 5 a 4 3 a 2 1 a 0 Bit Bit Bit Programming function 7 a 6 With these 2 bits you determine how coupled motion is to be performed 00 no coupled motion 10 coupled motion in opposite directions 11 coupled motion in the same direction 01 not defined Alarm...

Page 305: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 306: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 307: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 308: ... in AUTOMATIC and MDA modes for one axis at a time a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 309: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 310: ...ing speed G 97 Freeze spindle speed M 19 Oriented spindle stop The encoder is allocated in MD 400 which also activates the hardware monitor for the measuring circuits If the M19 option is invoked bit 2 must be set to 1 also see Section entitled Axis Analog and Spindle Installation Bit 1 Bit 1 1 The sign of the spindle encoder pulses is inverted every time this bit changes its status Siemens AG 199...

Page 311: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 312: ...mmand channel if the function is selected via MD 521 bit 0 and the end position is approached in M19 operation With this function a drift compensation is performed for the spindle when the setpoint position is reached in M19 mode speed 0 crossing of actual speed so that the following error of the position control is reduced The compensation value is derived from the sum of the NC spindle drift MD ...

Page 313: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 314: ...Bit 1 1 Number of encoder periods between two reference marks is a multiple of 10 Bit 0 Bit 0 0 The spindle actual value system is updated to the encoder zero marker signal Bit 0 1 digital drives only The spindle actual value system is updated when the external zero marker signal is received The external zero marker system BERO proximity switch must be connected to the drive module Note The bits h...

Page 315: ...operation immediately after Power On see Function description Master Slave This bit is therefore only active after Power On It is not longer possible to disable this function with a PLC signal Bit 3 If bit 3 is set a master or slave spindle which is also a following spindle is switched over to position controlled follow up mode if errors occur in the master slave grouping multidrive gearbox interp...

Page 316: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 317: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No NC MD 526 S...

Page 318: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No NC MD 527 Include tool length compen sation Include program med ZO G58 G59 Include external ZO Include settable ZO G54 G57 Include DRF and preset Ref system GI positions Active Immediately The bits below are defined for the following spindles They...

Page 319: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 320: ...ction threshold of an FA is exceeded Active At once a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 321: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 322: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 323: ...anges involving travel blocks with F values as it is not necessary to wait for an acknowledge ment from the PLC e g 5D machining a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 324: ...ary functions are output during block search with calculation 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 M functions are output during block search with calculation F H D T and S functions are collected and the last function output following NC START Irrelevant All auxiliary functions that were collected during block search are activated with NC START at the end of the block search and output to the PLC The collection procedu...

Page 325: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 326: ...0 Y0 Z0 D1 tool type 20 cutter Radius is calculated in X Y L1 is calculated in Z L2 is not calculated Program N10 G16 X Y Y Z plane selection N20 G0 G41 D1 X Y Z D1 tool type 30 angle headed cutter Radius is calculated in X Y L1 is calculated in Y L2 is calculated in Z Program N10 G16 Z X Z plane selection N20 G0 D1 Z D1 tool type 10 drill No radius is calculated L1 is calculated in Z Z X G18 is t...

Page 327: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 328: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 329: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 330: ...rrectly programmed The occurrence of axis specific spindle specific or channel specific alarms which result in opening of the closed position control loop removal of MODE GROUP READY on RESET and on EMERGENCY STOP the control is no longer able to position the rotary axis to a half or a whole degree In this case the rotary axis must not be lowered into the serration Active On NC STOP Bit 1 Bit 1 1 ...

Page 331: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 332: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 333: ...ensions are not regarded as overlaps For a list of permissible names see NC MD 5000 Active In the next block Permissible names for axes angle chamfer and radius A Assignable address N Subordinate block B Assignable address O Danger of confusion with 0 zero C Assignable address P Number of subroutine passes D Tool offset number Q Assignable address E Assignable address R Arithmetic parameter F Feed...

Page 334: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 335: ...an absolute G90 value of max 359 999 degrees The sign programmed determines the direction of movement See Programming Guide for programming rotary axes A rotary axis can also be programmed with G68 where positioning is along the shortest path max 180 degrees If a rotary axis is programmed for the first time is a part program the control always selects G68 irrespective of the G function program G68...

Page 336: ...n Active Block before decoding a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 337: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 338: ... ESR a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 339: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 340: ...efault value 0 Channel 5 and 6 as from SW 4 Note Valid if option Multi channel display is set As from SW 5 also valid with single channel display if NC MD 5053 bit 0 1 Note See also description of NC MD 5053 bit 0 channel specific axis and spindle display Channel specific spindle assignment with multiple channel display up to SW 4 Channel specific spindle assignment with single and multiple channe...

Page 341: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 342: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 343: ... be slightly higher than the value which would correspond to the braking distance from rapid traverse to NC MD 1 In program mode travel movements which would result in overshooting of the software limit switch position are simply not started alarm 2065 is triggered Exception Circular interpolation helical interpolation Start of deceleration to zero speed Reduction to NC MD 1 A E Software limit swi...

Page 344: ... after change without for instance Warm restart or Reset having to be performed If for instance the division machine data are changed while a division processing operation is in progress they will take effect after about only 100 ms Traversing an indexing axis to the reference point If the function is used on a machine specific basis the indexing axis can be traversed to a division specific refere...

Page 345: ... x MD 1116 Note This MD also has an effect when the measuring system of the digital drive 611 D is used D component feedforward control 1124 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 1 000 0 1 Active on NC Stop Active When activating feedforward control MD 1124 is used to modify the setpoint speed in proportion to acceleration Where position control cycles are 1 ms the rise proce...

Page 346: ...t is exceeded interface signal IKA TKH SPEED is set in DB 32 Speed tolerance endlessly turning rotary axis as from SW 4 1152 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 10 0 100 Active on see below If the actual speed of the endlessly turning rotary axis remains within the setpoint speed tolerance defined in this machine data interface bit Axis in setpoint range is set The tolerance mo...

Page 347: ... mode group in STOP With this MD it is possible to set a time where the contour deviation may exceed that of MD 332 without an alarm message Contour monitoring being output f Pulse multiplication EXE 611D HMS 2nd measuring system 1 1204 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 1 128 1 512 2 Active on Power On Active After POWER ON The matching of the internal computing precision a...

Page 348: ...not to C axes for spindles This machine data defines the maximum tolerance between the actual value of the first measuring system and the actual value of the second measuring system which must not be exceeded at the time of switching from one measuring system to another Otherwise a setpoint value jump occurs because the position controller tries to compensate for the change in the actual value To ...

Page 349: ...ay is set to 0 2 Time delay for removing the servo enable on the servo loop after EMERGENCY STOP and other errors leading to immediate stoppage of the axes e g contour monitoring 3 Time delay for removal of servo enable on the servo loop when the servo enable of an axis has be revoked by the PLC Modification of MD 1224 does not take effect until POWER ON and replaces the axis independent MD 156 Ba...

Page 350: ...cceleration 0 Minimum compensation as from SW 1 1240 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 16 000 0 01 2 0 1 mV Active on NC Stop See Section Functional Descriptions for installation of the friction feedforward control function Range limit 1 1244 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 16 000 100 units MS s2 Active on NC Stop Range limit 2 1248 Default val...

Page 351: ...pper input limit Units 0 0 1 000 0 1 ms Active on NC Stop The setpoint filter prevents overshooting of positions in the case of a dynamic speed feedforward control of 100 Note As from SW 4 for 8 parameter blocks a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Setpoint filter a a a a a a ...

Page 352: ... 100 0 16 000 units MS 100 0 99 999 999 as from SW 4 4 units MS Active on NC Stop Zero speed control window in fixed stop This data only takes effect when MD 1804 bit 3 1 If the position at which the fixed stop was triggered is exceeded by more than the tolerance defined in MD 1284 travel to fixed stop is aborted with an error message Torque compensation controller integral action time 1288 Defaul...

Page 353: ... SW 4 3 this time cannot be parameterized and is permanently set to 1 s Basic distance for distance coding 1300 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 000 0 16 000 Active on Power On Active After POWER ON The basic distance between the reference marks for distance coded linear scales entered in multiples of the grating pitch division period External pulse multiplication 1304 Def...

Page 354: ...d G33 to G36 G63 see Section entitled Functional Descriptions As the rotary axis and the infeed axes interpolate for tapping both of these axes must be set with the active servo gain factor The time constants for the dynamic feedforward control see NC MD 1324 and the feed forward control factor NC MD 1260 can also be used to reduce the following error Input value 0 means that instead of 1320 the v...

Page 355: ...e master to a slave for speed setpoint coupling The speed setpoint is taken from the axis entered here and output as the speed setpoint while ignoring its own position control The assignment is made with the axis spindle number Value 0 1 30 41 46 Meaning No axis spindle Axis 1 30 Spindle 1 6 Master for torque compensation control as from SW 4 4 1340 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limi...

Page 356: ...op MD 1236 defines the recovery time for the compensation setpoint pulse when operation is without its adaptation MD 1236 applies to neural and conventional quadrant error compensation If the adaptation of the recovery time constant neural QEC only is selected MD 1812 bit 2 1 MD 1236 defines the filter time constant in the middle of the working range MD 1364 defines the value for acceleration 0 Le...

Page 357: ... percentage is entered in MD 1236 The middle measuring duration MD 1376 is also used for conventional quadrant error compensation if the service QEC display is used to make the settings Special features If the value 0 is entered in MD 1236 100 10 ms as otherwise it is not possible to parameterize error measuring times 0 Torque compensation controller P component as from SW 4 4 1384 Default value L...

Page 358: ...of parameter set switchover Position control cycle 1396 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 1 64 Active on Power On NC MD 1396 modifies NC MD 155 Position controller sampling time i e the controller can be slowed down by a factor of 2 to 64 Permissible values 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 The following applies Position control cycle time Position control basic cycle x MD 1396 Interpolatio...

Page 359: ... Active on NC Stop This machine data is only used for the functionality Electronic gearbox The parallel model must be set to the time constant of the position control loop of the following axis time constant T 1 servo gain If the value 16000 is entered in the machine data the system automatically calculates the actual servo gain factor and the time constant of the following axis However this actua...

Page 360: ...lectronic gearbox With LINK ACTIVE the positional difference between the following axis and the leading axes can be monitored with the machine data value Emergency retraction threshold The emergency retraction monitoring must be enabled by setting an interface signal If the positional difference exceeds this threshold value it can be output very quickly via a digital hardware signal An NC alarm Fo...

Page 361: ...ink during faults After the delay shown above the following spindle switches from controlled follow up to normal follow up follow up mode Effect of the input values different cases 0 No controlled follow up immediate normal follow up 1 15000 Initial controlled follow up switchover to normal follow up after the delay 15001 and higher Always controlled follow up no switchover to normal follow up Def...

Page 362: ...setpoint filter 2nd 8th parameter set as from SW 4 1484 1508 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 1 000 0 1 ms Active on at once These MD have the same meaning as MD 1272 see also Functional Descriptions Parameter set switchover Scaling factor max velocity 2nd 8th parameter set as from SW 4 1512 1536 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 10 000 1 99 999 999...

Page 363: ...P component compensatory controller 2nd 8th parameter set as from SW 4 1624 1648 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 16 000 1 Active on RESET These MD have the same meaning as MD 1420 see also Functional Descriptions Parameter set switchover I component compensatory controller 2nd 8th parameter set as from SW 4 1652 1676 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Uni...

Page 364: ...nput limit Units 11 000 1 99 999 999 10 000 units s2 Active on NC Stop Meaning Limitation of max velocity for following axis These machine data are only active with gearbox interpolation Note For parameter grouping see under Functional Descriptions Parameter set switchover Alarm limit acceleration 1st 8th parameter set as from SW 4 1768 1796 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units ...

Page 365: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 366: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No NC MD 1804 Adaptation as f...

Page 367: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 368: ...volution is not exhausted 14 bits 16384 2500 hardware multiplication 4 Information for the Position within one revolution can therefore be derived with a modulo 2500 4 calculation from the absolute value Because an overflow beyond the stated number of max 65536 encoder revolutions is expected when a absolute encoder for endlessly turning rotary axes is used an overflow compensation should be used ...

Page 369: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 370: ... and MD 1808 bit 3 Absolute offset valid is set for the relevant axis The absolute offset is calculated on the basis of the equation Machine system SIPOS Endat system absolute offset or Absolute offset machine system SIPOS Endat system The following applies Machine system desired absolute position reference point ordinate and SIPOS Endat system displayed absolute position actual value Note If a va...

Page 371: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 372: ...is switched over to position controlled follow up mode if errors occur in the master slave grouping If no extended stopping and retract is active switchover is also performed if errors occur in the same mode group Note This function must not be used if the master is simultaneously the leading axis for the slave as then an unstable control loop results Bit 2 The adaptation of the compensation time ...

Page 373: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No NC MD 1820 ...

Page 374: ...7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No NC MD 1824 Effect of LEC on mea suring systems 00 first 01 second 10 both 11 both Setting of reference dimension allowed Sign change actual value 2 as from SW 2 Set abso lute system to reference dimension as from SW 3 Multiple assign set points as from SW 3 2nd measuring system exists as from SW 2 QEC undelayed as from SW 5 Bit 7 Assignment of LEC to measuring system 1 2 Bit...

Page 375: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No NC MD 1828 Linear scale as from SW 6 3 Extended parameter set switch over as from SW 4 NC MD 1828 bit 1 This bit is only used for linear axes with ENDAT absolute encoders Bit 1 Bit 1 1 Linear scale not available Maximum traversing range of this axis is then half of the maximum traversing range of the absolute e...

Page 376: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 377: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 378: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Tdelay delay derived from the time constant of the parallel model Following axis spindle specific machine data bits a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 379: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 380: ...imit 1 0 4 as from SW 4 6 Active on Warm restart If MD 20440 is defined as 2 the basic display for channel 2 appears on the left or in the large actual value display in the upper part of the display Multi channel display right or below 20441 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit 2 0 4 as from SW 4 6 Active on Warm restart If MD 20441 is defined as 2 the basic display for channel 2 appe...

Page 381: ...sets see functional description of Ratio parameter group Zero mark correction as from SW 4 1st to 4th parameter set 2416 2419 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 999 999 999 999 units MS Active on NC Stop r1 Load no of revolutions 2420 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 Active This MD is used for internal calculation only r2 Motor no of revolutions 2421...

Page 382: ...r input limit Units 0 0 1 000 0 1 Active on NC Stop These MD have the same meaning as MD 465 see also functional description of parameter set switchover Feedforward control factor D component as from SW 4 1st to 8 th parameter set 2449 2456 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 1 000 0 1 Active on NC Stop Time constant symm filter 2nd 8th par set as from SW 4 2457 2463 Defaul...

Page 383: ... defined as 0 1 or 1 rpm in MD 5200 bit 3 Position limit for M19 2nd to 8th parameter set as from SW 4 2487 2493 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 2 000 0 720 000 units MS 2 000 0 99 999 999 as from SW 4 4 units MS 2 000 0 72 000 000 Active on NC Stop These MD have the same meaning as MD 443 see also Functional Descriptions Parameter set switchover P component comp contr 2nd ...

Page 384: ...1 rpm Active on NC Stop These machine data are active only with gear interpolation Alarm limit acc constant as from SW 4 1st to 8th par set 2530 2537 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units MD 478 ff 10 0 50 000 ms Active on NC Stop These machine data are active only with gear interpolation Tol band synchr fine 2nd 8th par set as from SW 4 2546 2552 Default value Lower input limit ...

Page 385: ...peed setpoint coupling The speed setpoint is taken from the spindle entered here and output as the speed setpoint while ignoring its own position control The assignment is made with the axis spindle number Value 0 1 30 41 46 Meaning No axis spindle Axis 1 30 Spindle 1 6 Master for torque compensation control 1 2701 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 50 Active on Power On M...

Page 386: ...ation controller is parameterized in of the ratio drive maximum speed to nominal torque of the slave drive The input variable of the torque compensation controller is the difference in torque between master and slave the output variable is a speed setpoint See also MD 1812 and 523 Formula Output variable P gain control difference Example A torque difference of 10 of the slave nominal torque and st...

Page 387: ...st par set to 8th par set 3128 3156 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 999 999 16 000 as from SW 4 4 999 999 16 000 as from SW 4 4 units MS Active on NC Stop These MDs are used to correct gear stage related offsets between the zero mark and reference position see functional description of Ratio parameter group Backlash comp 1st measuring system 2 2nd par set to 8th par set 3...

Page 388: ...nput limit Upper input limit Units 400 0 16 000 99 999 999 SW5 4 and higher 1 unit MS Active on RESET These MD have the same meaning as MD 1444 see also Functional Descriptions Parameter set switchover Time const set speed link path 1st to 8th par set as from SW 4 3300 3328 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 16 000 0 1 ms Active on NC Stop See also Functional Descriptions ...

Page 389: ...ntour monitoring 3420 from SW 6 3 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 600 0 1 ms Active at once When using a PT1 speed setpoint smoothing filter drive MD 1502 or 1503 the value entered there must be entered under NC MD 3420 By gradually adjusting the input value NC MD 3420 up or down a setting can be found resulting in still further reduced contour deviation during accelera...

Page 390: ...input limit Units 0 0 30 Axis no POWER ON The motion axes are assigned to the protection zone in the protection zone specific machine data Protection zone number 1st protection zone 0 2nd protection zone 1 to 32nd protection zone 31 The value entered is the global axis number ZERO means no axis The axes must exist and belong to the same mode group If an error occurs alarm 111 Error in collision mo...

Page 391: ...ta Dimension X coordinate as from SW 6 3824 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 99 999 999 MS POWER ON Dimension Y coordinate as from SW 6 3828 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 99 999 999 MS POWER ON Dimension Z coordinate as from SW 6 3832 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 99 999 999 MS POWER ON Protection zone number 1s...

Page 392: ...ne data Value range 0 1 1st machine coordinate system 2 2nd machine coordinate system 3 3rd machine coordinate system 4 4th machine coordinate system Note For more detailed information please see Functional Description 3876 Res Res Res Res Res Res Additive protection zone adjustment as from SW 6 3 Protection zone exists MD No Bit No 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 with protection zone index 1st protection zone 0 ...

Page 393: ...No monitoring of PZ 25 MD No Bit No 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 with protection zone index 1st protection zone 0 2nd protection zone 1 to 32nd protection zone 31 Mutual monitoring of stationary protection zones can be deselected in the protection zone specific machine data in order to reduce the CPU load Abbreviation PZ Protection zone MD 3880 Bit 0 7 1 No monitoring of protection zone 1 8 0 Monitoring of pro...

Page 394: ...ts 100 000 Active r1 Load no of revolutions 1 3916 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 Active r2 Motor no of revolutions 1 3920 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 Active p Pulses per revolution 1 3924 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 2 500 Active I Spindle pitch or g Grating constant 1 3928 Default value Lower input limit Upper in...

Page 395: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 2 d Amax a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Vperm A reduction factor is calculated from Vperm and Vmax and transmitted to the mode group channels In a similar way to an override the reduction factor is included in the path velocity calculation in all mode group channels Redu...

Page 396: ...nput limit Units 704 KB 8 960 or 2 760 KB 4 920 KB as from SW 4 4 4 KB Active after SK Reconfigure memory The upper input limit depends on the NCK memory capacity 4 or 8 MB memory Number of IKA points 1 60002 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 4 000 0 0 65 535 1 IKA point Active after SK Reconfigure memory Zero means no IKA points Memory for drive software MSD 1 60003 Default ...

Page 397: ...imit Upper input limit Units 0 0 1 Active after SK Reconfigure memory If an area of the memory is reserved for FDD drive software 194 KB memory is occupied Zero means no memory The memory is only required for digital drives The software only loads the FDD software if the memory has been reserved for it Note The meaning of this machine data changes as from SW 6 Load FD drive software as from SW 6 6...

Page 398: ... memory See functional description of Flexible memory configuration Number of central R parameters as from SW 4 60008 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 600 0 9 300 1 R parameter Active after SK Reconfigure memory The upper input limit depends on the number of tools see MD 60005 60006 and the number of channel specific R parameters see MD 60007 See functional description of Fl...

Page 399: ...pprox 16 KB axis Active Power On This MD is used to define the memory for real axes 15 If the user has defined more real axes than memory is available alarm 71 is displayed Number of memory blocks for drive software as from SW 6 60014 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 6 96 Kbytes Active Power On Memory for drive software MSD FDD 0 2 3 4 6 blocks of 96 Kbytes each see also...

Page 400: ...for extended overstore channel 6 as from SW 5 61025 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 1 approx 50 KB Active Power On As from SW5 the function Extended overstore is enabled in the Flexible memory configuration fiel ncmemcfg The file can be edited via the MDD menu tree Startup Machine data NC machine data ETC Flex memory conf The function can be switched on or off in the ch...

Page 401: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 402: ...n of NC setting data SD No 0 999 General values SD No 2000 2999 Channel specific values SD No 3000 3999 Axis specific values SD No 4000 4999 Spindle specific values SD No 5000 5399 General bits SD No 5400 5599 Channel specific bits SD No 5600 5799 Axis specific bits SD No 6000 6999 Axis Spindle converter SD No 7000 7007 Software cam 1 The setting data are selected with the area switchover key and ...

Page 403: ...g Coarse setting G54 1st 2nd 3rd 4th settable zero offset G55 G56 G57 1st programmable zero offset G58 2nd programmable zero offset G59 External zero offset from PLC DRF offset with handwheel PRESET offset Initial setting for programming is G54 G58 1st programmable ZO G59 2nd programmable ZO external ZO external ZO from PLC The values are transmitted from the PLC via the external data input The va...

Page 404: ... a a a a a a a a a a a R300 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a R00 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a R49 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a R50 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a R99 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a R100 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a R199 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 405: ...ement is used R110 to R199 are free for the user R200 R219 Siemens assignment cycle converter R220 R239 CL800 compiler on WS800 compiler Siemens assignment R240 R299 Intended for internal assignment by Siemens as required R300 Stack pointer for 040 041 042 043 set to 301 with each M2 M30 RESET R301 R499 Stack area for 040 041 042 043 R500 R599 100 new global R parameters per channel Use as for R10...

Page 406: ...up time high T value The programmed ramp up time also acts as the smoothing time i e the actual spindle speed is averaged via this value an even feedrate is thus obtained The smoothing and feed ramp up time depends on the programmed value T the interpolation cycle which is set in NC MD 155 this machine data should only be changed by a properly trained specialist The value T must be an integer Poss...

Page 407: ... is initialized for turning the actual value coupling between the spindle speed actual value and the feed setpoint is not direction dependent This means that the spindle can continue turning in one direction while the feed axis is reprogrammed to change direction With G34 G35 the thread lead is altered per turn by the value programmed under address F until the maximum or minimum possible value is ...

Page 408: ...d it is easy to produce a multiple thread This setting data can be altered via the user interface or by programming G92 A in the part program The option Extended thread package must be active for this function The last angle to be entered is saved after Power off Maximum number of predecoded blocks as from SW 5 204 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 ca 3 500 Blocks Active ...

Page 409: ...be read in the part program 310 by the PLC The user can use this command to control predecoding from the PLC see also function Control of predecoding G171 G172 The value must not be overwritten It is constantly updated by the NC when the part program is active Note The actual number of predecoded blocks never reaches the value set in the memory configuration because up to 20 buffers are used for i...

Page 410: ...he programmed axis positions using the scale factor lies see Programming Guide for detailed description The scale centre is programmed together with G51 in the block Clamping torque for move against fixed stop 320 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 1 999 0 1 Active on This SD is used to define the desired clamping torque as a of the max torque of the component Input in units...

Page 411: ...rammed with G92 SD 403 Programmable spindle speed limitation programmed with G26 Spindle position with M19 402 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 35 999 0 01 Active on This setting data specifies the angle to which the spindle is positioned when M19 is programmed in the part program or MDA Overstore without specifying an S value If an S value is programmed with M19 it is t...

Page 412: ...Bit 2 0 1 Standard cycles up to UMS031 active Bit 7 Bit 7 1 Overtravel compensation functions Bit 7 0 No calculation of overtravel compensation SD 5001 Bit 2 Bit 2 1 The part program is either stored in the source workpiece or in workpiece STANDARD or NCKTMP depending on the setting in MD 5189 bit 3 Bit 0 Bit 0 1 The actual value display for axes actual position refers to the workpiece zero and no...

Page 413: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 414: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 415: ...e only when you use the measuring cycles from Version 20 For a detailed description of the cycles machine data please refer to the a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 416: ... limit Units 0 rev min Active at once Display machine data for the present setpoint of the motor speed in rev min Speed actual value 2 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 rev min Active at once Display machine data for the present actual value of the motor speed in rev min Motor voltage 3 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units V Active at once Display mac...

Page 417: ...A Active at once Display machine data for the present reactive power consumption of the motor Motor active power 9 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units kW Active at once Display machine data for the present active power consumption of the motor Note The sign indicates whether the motor is operating as a motor or a generator Motor temperature 10 Default value Lower output limit...

Page 418: ...Bit 6 Image terminal 64 of I RF unit central drive enable setpoint 0 0 Controller enable 1 Regenerative braking Bit 7 Not assigned Bit 8 Image terminal 5 of I RF unit motor power section temperature prewarning X12T 0 Normal range 1 Limit value exceeded Bit 9 15 Not assigned Speed for max motor operational speed motor 1 14 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Maximum motor speed ...

Page 419: ...se the contents of MD 20 to be increased repeatedly by several increments Possible causes of disturbances Encoder shield not earthed Encoder defective Earth connection of electronics ground in MSD module faulty Motor earth not connected in MSD module Value entered for motor moment of inertia too high Evaluation electronics nmin for nact nmin message motor 1 21 Default value Lower input limit Upper...

Page 420: ...put limit Upper output limit Units 0000 0000 Hex Active at once Output of diagnostic messages which do not cause tripping pulse disable 0008 H Temperature sensor circuit interrupted or shorted 2000 H Division interrupt Error in calculation routines or incorrect entry of data Speed limitation motor 1 29 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Maximum motor speed 0 Maximum motor spee...

Page 421: ...ng machine data Note The smoothing function can be activated in machine data MD 44 Encoder phase error compensation motor 1 36 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 400 400 Active at once Phase errors in the encoder signals can be compensated by means of a correction function The amplitude of this function is specified via machine data MD 36 Note Default value 0 means no correc...

Page 422: ...e rated value the torque limit curve drops in proportion to 1 n so that the rated output is reached in each case MD 40 MD 43 MD 47 and MD 50 are the corresponding machine data Generative limitation motor 1 40 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100 5 100 Active at once Input of torque limit for braking operation generator mode torque limit This input value is referred to the ma...

Page 423: ...smoothing function at speeds above value set in machine data MD 45 and MD 274 Cut in speed torque setpoint smoothing motor 1 45 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 4 000 0 Maximum motor speed rev min Active at once Input of speed value above which the torque setpoint smoothing function activated in machine data MD 44 is applied Hysteresis MD 45 motor 1 46 Default value Lower in...

Page 424: ...t Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Active at once A range of control functions can be selected and altered by entering bit patterns in the control word Selection of bits Not assigned Bit 0 Ramp function generator rapid stop Bit 1 0 The motor remains connected to the supply after shutdown by the ramp generator rapid stop function 1 The motor is isolated from the supply when the speed drops below the intern...

Page 425: ...entered then the motor is operated at the specified fixed temperature value Note The motor temperature monitoring function set in machine data MD 63 is made inoperative if a fixed temperature is specified Timer motor temperature alarm 65 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 240 0 600 s Active at once Input of timer for the motor temperature alarm A warning is output as soon as t...

Page 426: ...imit Upper input limit Units 0000 FF80 007F Hex Active at once Note This machine data is not included in the machine data lists The DACs are configured in the course of the drive servo start up procedure for diagnostic purposes Input of an offset value for DAC2 which is added to the value prior to analog output Address DAC1 76 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 3044 0000 FFFF ...

Page 427: ...cluded in the machine data lists The DACs are configured in the course of the drive servo start up procedure for diagnostic purposes Input of an offset value for DAC1 which is added to the value prior to analog output Power section code number 95 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 7 6 12 Active Power On Note This machine data is not included in the machine data lists During st...

Page 428: ...A for T 100 K 0 in A for T 100 K 1PH6101 4NF4 x 1500 3 7 12 5 6 2 101 1PH6101 4NG4 x 2000 4 7 13 7 6 9 102 1PH6103 4NF4 x 1500 5 5 17 9 9 1 103 1PH6103 4NG4 x 2000 7 0 19 4 9 9 104 1PH6105 4NF4 x 1500 7 5 22 5 11 5 105 1PH6105 4NG4 x 2000 9 5 25 3 13 1 106 1PH6107 4NF4 x 1500 9 0 26 9 14 2 107 1PH6107 4NG4 x 2000 11 5 29 8 15 6 108 1PH6131 4NF4 x 1500 9 0 27 2 11 7 109 1PH6131 4NG4 x 2000 12 0 32 ...

Page 429: ...x 2000 45 0 83 3 32 2 138 1PH6163 4NZ0 x 950 19 0 56 0 25 2 139 1PH6105 4NZ4 x 3000 12 0 27 0 15 6 140 1PH6167 4NG0 x 2000 45 0 85 0 29 5 141 1PH6186 4NB4 x 500 22 0 66 0 35 5 160 1PH6186 4NB4 x 610 26 8 66 0 35 5 161 1PH6206 4NB4 x 500 32 0 96 0 48 0 162 1PH6186 4NE4 x 1250 42 0 86 0 46 0 163 1PH6186 4NF4 x 1500 50 0 100 0 52 0 164 1PH6206 4NE4 x 1250 63 0 125 0 64 0 165 1PH6206 4NF4 x 1500 76 0 ...

Page 430: ...7 4NF2 x 1500 27 0 81 9 30 3 310 1PH6137 4NF6 x 1500 25 0 92 8 35 9 311 1PH4138 4NF2 x 1500 30 0 97 3 33 8 312 1PH4138 4NF6 x 1500 28 0 102 2 40 0 313 1PH4163 4NF2 x 1500 37 0 103 0 44 0 314 1PH4163 4ND6 x 1000 25 0 103 8 42 4 315 1PH4167 4NF2 x 1500 46 0 115 0 49 2 316 1PH4167 4ND6 x 1000 31 0 129 4 50 7 317 1PH4168 4NF2 x 1500 52 0 143 0 58 8 318 1PH4168 4ND6 x 1000 35 0 143 9 58 6 319 1PH2093 6...

Page 431: ...data file The bootstrap mode is terminated by setting MD 97 to 2H No of encoder marks motor measuring system 98 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 2 048 128 4 096 Active on Power On Note This machine data is not included in the machine data lists During start up in machine data dialog the machine data is set or altered as appropriate via the configuration setting Input of enco...

Page 432: ...ain and a negative value in a lower gain than the gain value calculated The total gain obtained by adding the calculated value and the correction in MD 116 is displayed in MD 316 Selection torque setpoint filter motor 1 117 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 0001 Hex Active at once The digital filter is activated and deactivated in this machine data A digital filter ...

Page 433: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Phase current controller gain a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 120 a a a a a a a a a a a a n a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 116 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 337 Module identifier 150 Default value Low...

Page 434: ... motor data sheet non Siemens motor or automatic parameterization using machine data Motor code number MD 96 Motor rated voltage motor 1 162 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 0 500 0 V Active on Power On Input of motor rated voltage as specified on the motor data sheet non Siemens motor or automatic parameterization using machine data Motor code number MD 96 ...

Page 435: ...ata sheet non Siemens motor or automatic parameterization using machine data Motor code number MD 96 Rotor resistance cold motor 1 168 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 0 32 767 m Active on Power On Input of rotor resistance cold as specified on the motor data sheet non Siemens motor or automatic parameterization using machine data Motor code number MD 96 Sta...

Page 436: ...ich field weakening begins to the unsaturated value at the upper limit speed of the Xh characteristic see diagram MD 175 Speed at start of field weakening motor 1 173 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 100 6 000 rev min Active on Power On Input of speed at which field weakening starts as specified on the motor data sheet non Siemens motor or automatic paramete...

Page 437: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 173 MD 233 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 172 MD 232 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 438: ...etail below The PLC requests a star delta switchover via a bit in the control word As soon as the drive has evaluated this control bit the motor pulses are suppressed and an appropriate pulse suppression signal sent to the PLC Only after arrival of this signal may the PLC separate motor contactor 1 The PLC must wait until motor contactor 1 is open before it reverses the winding connection by closi...

Page 439: ...ut limit Upper input limit Units 0C06 0000 FFFF Hex Active at once Input of address 1 to be monitored for variable relay function 1 Threshold for monitoring 1 186 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Active at once Input of threshold value 1 of address 1 to be monitored for variable relay function 1 ON delay monitoring 1 187 Default value Lower input limit Upp...

Page 440: ... FFFF Hex Active at once Input of threshold value 2 of address 2 to be monitored for variable relay function 2 ON delay monitoring 2 192 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 10 00 s Active at once Input of ON delay 2 of address 2 to be monitored for variable relay function 2 Drop delay monitoring 2 193 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 10 00 s Activ...

Page 441: ...ta from MD 198 and MD 201 are applied at speeds above the value specified in this machine data see diagram MD 203 P gain upper adaptation speed motor 1 198 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 24 0 0 120 0 Active at once Input of P gain for the upper adaptation speed This machine data contains the P gain at speeds above the value entered in MD 196 see diagram MD 203 Reduction fa...

Page 442: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 202 MD 289 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 201 MD 288 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 443: ...t or stop conditions 2H After MD 206 has been set the recording does not start until the start condition MD 208 MD 209 has been fulfilled Recording takes place without a stop condition 4H The recorder memories can be preset with this setting The contents of MD 217 are written to the recorder memories 5H After MD 206 has been set the recording starts immediately until the stop condition MD 210 MD 2...

Page 444: ...ng signal 1 see also MD 206 Address for signal 2 213 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0C04 0000 FFFF Hex Active at once Input of address of recording signal 2 see also MD 206 Start output of recording 214 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 0001 Hex Active at once Input of start for the output of the transient recorder function see also MD 206 T...

Page 445: ...1 ms long trigger signal can be output on commencement of the analog output Motor moment of inertia motor 2 219 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 0 002 32 000 kgm2 Active on Power On Input of motor moment of inertia as specified on the motor data sheet non Siemens motor or automatic parameterization using machine data Motor code number MD 238 Motor rated powe...

Page 446: ...ta sheet non Siemens motor or automatic parameterization using machine data Motor code number MD 238 Motor no load voltage motor 2 225 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 0 500 0 V Active on Power On Input of motor no load voltage as specified on the motor data sheet non Siemens motor or automatic parameterization using machine data Motor code number MD 238 Mot...

Page 447: ...tor data sheet non Siemens motor or automatic parameterization using machine data Motor code number MD 238 Magnetizing reactance motor 2 231 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 0 65 535 m Active on Power On Input of magnetizing reactance as specified on the motor data sheet non Siemens motor or automatic parameterization using machine data Motor code number MD ...

Page 448: ...motor 2 235 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 100 300 Active on Power On Input of gain factor Xh2 Xh1 of the Xh characteristic magnetizing reactance as specified on the motor data sheet non Siemens motor or automatic parameterization using machine data Motor code number MD 238 In the field weakening range the magnetizing reactance Xh increases linearly from t...

Page 449: ...9 non Siemens motor must be entered as the motor code number See machine data MD 96 for table of motors Programmable message 1 241 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 2 1 20 Active at once A function can be assigned to programmable message 1 in this machine data The range of available functions is listed in the table below The default setting corresponds to Ramp up complete Tab...

Page 450: ...ximum motor temperature is reached MD 63 for motor 1 MD 291 for motor 2 If the message does not disappear then the drive module is shut down with the Motor overtemperature alarm after the delay which can be set in MD 65 Heat sink overtemperature prewarning function no 6 The PLC status message is set when the temperature switch of the main heat sink responds If the message does not disappear then t...

Page 451: ...r input limit Upper input limit Units 4 1 20 Active at once A function can be assigned to programmable message 4 in this machine data The default setting corresponds to nact nx see MD 241 for other settings Programmable message 5 245 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 20 1 20 Active at once A function can be assigned to programmable message 5 in this machine data The default s...

Page 452: ...essage 3 inverted 0004H Bit 3 Programmable message 4 inverted 0008H Bit 4 Programmable message 5 inverted 0010H Bit 5 Programmable message 6 inverted 0020H Bits 6 7 Not assigned Bit 8 Sign evaluation monitoring 1 0040H Bit 9 Sign evaluation monitoring 2 0080H Bits 10 15 Not assigned Display of active functions 1 254 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units Hex Active at once Displ...

Page 453: ...e Not assigned Travel to fixed stop Not assigned Sign of life from NC 0 Not active 1 Active Speed for max motor operational speed motor 2 258 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Maximum motor speed Maximum motor speed rev min Active at once Machine data MD 258 defines the maximum operating speed of the main spindle motor It acts as the reference value of the speed setpoint inte...

Page 454: ...as the response value of the nmin monitor but it may be set to the same value nx for nact nx message motor 2 262 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 6 000 0 Maximum motor speed rev min Active at once Input of response value for monitoring of the PLC status message nact nx see also MD 241 Tolerance band for nset nact message motor 2 263 Default value Lower input limit Upper inpu...

Page 455: ...67 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 32 000 0 32 000 rev min Active at once Input of the switchover speed for evaluation of the motor encoder In this case it is possible to switch between the square wave and SINE COSINE evaluation modes Square wave evaluation is applied at speeds above the maximum value entered Hysteresis MD 267 motor 2 268 Default value Lower input limit Upp...

Page 456: ...nd torque limit value referred to the 1st torque limit MD 269 This 2nd torque limit can be selected via the PLC control word and machine data MD 290 Switchover speed for MD 270 motor 2 272 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500 0 Maximum motor speed rev min Active at once Input of speed above which the generator mode limit set in machine data MD 270 is applied see also MD 269 ...

Page 457: ...nnel see MD 280 1 00 Basis quality 1 Correction P gain current controller motor 2 278 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 255 255 Active at once The current controller P gain which is calculated according to the motor converter and converter switching frequency can be corrected by an offset in this machine data A positive value in MD 278 results in a higher gain and a negativ...

Page 458: ...wer input limit Upper input limit Units 1 200 0 max speed rev min Active at once Input of upper adaptation speed for the speed controller The speed controller machine data can be adapted i e the P gain and reset time altered as a function of speed in gear stage 1 The machine data from MD 285 and MD 288 are applied at speeds above the value specified in this machine data see diagram MD 203 P gain u...

Page 459: ...nd torque limit MD 271 takes place This switchover is implemented only if the appropriate bit has been set in the control word and the switchover speed set in MD 290 has been exceeded Maximum motor temperature motor 2 291 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 0 170 C Active at once Input of maximum motor temperature The value entered can be lower the maximum temp...

Page 460: ...r 2 293 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 7 Active at once Input of activation point for speed controller adaption The diagram shows how the individual machine data influence the speed characteristic see MD 203 for diagram 0 No speed controller adaption 1 No function assigned at present 2 Speed controller adaption activated 3 No function assigned at present Note The speed...

Page 461: ...78 P gain current controller motor 2 The resulting value is displayed in MD 316 When the star delta switchover function is enabled the display is referred to the currently active operating mode Creep speed angle controller 337 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 300 0 600 rev min Active at once Input of creep speed of angle controller At speeds above the value entered here the ...

Page 462: ...ftware functions Input values are 62 5 µs or 125 µs Intermediate values are not permissible parameterization error Notes Exceeding the computing time on the current controller clock cycle level is not permissible and will lead to tripping of the drive In the case of double axis modules both drives must be parameterized with the same current controller clock cycle otherwise parameterization error S...

Page 463: ...n Power On Input of number of encoder increments per motor revolution of the motor measuring system Note The indirect measuring system must always be configured for FDD MSD Frequency pulse width modulation 1100 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 3 200 2 000 8 000 Hz Active on Power On The frequency of the sampling triangle in the PWM inverter is defined in this machine data Th...

Page 464: ...der to make the setpoints on all power sections valid simultaneously to achieve uniform dynamic response the time required to calculate the most complex axis double axis is entered Setting values worstcase execution times 40 µs single axis module 50 µs double axis module Note Limits of calculation dead time violation leads to error message MD 1101 MD 1000 x 31 25 µs current controller clock cycle ...

Page 465: ...ally Motor table Order No Rated speed Motor code no nrated in rev min 1FT6102 8AB7X XXXX 1500 1001 1FT6105 8AB7X XXXX 1500 1002 1FT6108 8AB7X XXXX 1500 1003 1FT6132 6AB7X XXXX 1500 1004 1FT6134 6AB7X XXXX 1500 1005 1FT6136 6AB7X XXXX 1500 1006 1FT6061 6AC7X XXXX 2000 1101 1FT6062 6AC7X XXXX 2000 1102 1FT6064 6AC7X XXXX 2000 1103 1FT6081 8AC7X XXXX 2000 1104 1FT6082 8AC7X XXXX 2000 1105 1FT6084 8AC...

Page 466: ...nits 1 0 0 0 500 A Active at once Input of rated current consumption RMS value in operation at rated torque and rated speed as specified on the motor data sheet non Siemens motor or automatic parameterization using machine data Motor code number MD 1102 Maximum motor current 1104 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 2 0 0 0 500 A Active on Power On Input of maximum permissible m...

Page 467: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 468: ...6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Not assigned Amperage 0 1 No power section specified 3 6 A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 5 10 A Not assigned 9 18 A Not assigned 18 36 A 28 56 A Not assigned 56 112 A 70 140 A Not assigned Limit current transistor 1107 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 200 1 500 A Active on Power On Input of maximum permissible current of power section This input makes allow...

Page 469: ...nd MD 1108 power section limit current x 2 Example Max motor current MD 1104 5 A Reduction max motor current MD 1105 100 Transistor limit current MD 1107 25 A Power section limit current MD 1108 18 A Unit specific max permissible current normal mode min 100 x 5 A 25 A 18 A x 2 Unit specific max permissible current normal mode 5 A Example 1 Reduction factor max motor current set up mode MD 1110 50 ...

Page 470: ...S value of the motor terminals line to line Armature resistance 1115 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 20 V A Active on Power On Input of ohmic resistance of the armature winding phase value as specified on the motor data sheet non Siemens motor or automatic parameterization using machine data Motor code number MD 1102 Armature inductance 1116 Default value Lower input li...

Page 471: ...urrent controller or automatic parameterization using machine data Motor code number MD 1102 Note Integral arm can be disabled by entering the value TN 0 Selection current setpoint filter 1200 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 0 4 Active at once Input of number of current setpoint filters Band stop and low pass filters are available these are set via the machine data Config...

Page 472: ...e Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 2 000 0 8 000 Hz Active at once Input of natural frequency for current setpoint filter 1 PT2 low pass An entry of 10 Hz as the natural frequency of the low pass filter initializes the filter as a proportional element with a gain of 1 independently of the associated damping The filter is activated via machine data MD 1200 and MD 1201 Note Current setpoint...

Page 473: ...ut of damping for current setpoint filter 2 PT2 low pass The filter is activated via machine data MD 1200 selection current setpoint filter and MD type current setpoint filter 1201 Natural frequency current setpoint filter 3 1206 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 8 000 Hz Active at once Input of natural frequency for current setpoint filter 3 PT2 low pass An entry of 10 H...

Page 474: ...ut of damping for current setpoint filter 4 PT2 low pass The filter is activated via machine data MD 1200 selection current setpoint filter and MD type current setpoint filter 1201 Block frequency current setpoint filter 1 1210 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 3 500 0 1 7 999 0 Hz Active at once Input of block frequency for current setpoint filter 1 band stop When block freq...

Page 475: ...equency current setpoint filter 2 1213 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 3 500 0 1 7 999 0 Hz Active at once Input of block frequency for current setpoint filter 2 band stop When block frequencies of 10 Hz are input the filter is deactivated proportional element with a gain of 1 The filter is activated via machine data MD 1200 and MD 1201 Note The maximum block frequency inpu...

Page 476: ...er 3 band stop When block frequencies of 10 Hz are input the filter is deactivated proportional element with a gain of 1 The filter is activated via machine data MD 1200 and MD 1201 Note The maximum block frequency input value is limited by the sampling frequency of the control MD 1000 parameterization error 1 1 MD 1216 2 x MD 1000 2 x Isampl MD 1000 Tsampl 62 5 µs 125 0 µs MD 1216 8000 Hz 4000 Hz...

Page 477: ...width for current setpoint filter 4 band stop The filter is activated in machine data MD 1200 and MD 1201 Note When 0 is entered for the bandwidth the filter is parameterized as a proportional element with a gain of 1 Motor rated speed 1400 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 500 0 6 000 rev min Active on Power On Input of motor rated speed as specified on the motor data shee...

Page 478: ...ler enabling command in the course of a creep operation the pulses are suppressed by a software function and the drive shut down until it is re enabled by SERVO The default value 0 means that the machine data is deactivated pulse suppression is then implemented solely via the machine data Timer pulse suppression MD 1404 The functionality of this machine data is required 1 With high inertia as zero...

Page 479: ...ge MD 1408 are not subject to any mutual restrictions See machine data Adaptation lower speed threshold MD 1411 for diagram Note Before the P gain is set to 0 the associated integral action component MD 1409 must be deactivated to maintain controller stability MD 1407 is active over the entire speed range when the Speed controller adaptation is deactivated MD 1413 0 P gain upper adaptation speed 1...

Page 480: ... Units 10 0 500 ms Active at once Input of integral action time of speed control loop in upper speed range N upper speed threshold MD 1412 The integral action times in the lower speed range MD 1409 and the upper speed range MD 1410 are not subject to any mutual restrictions See machine data Adaptation lower speed threshold MD 1411 for diagram Note Setting the integral action time to zero deactivat...

Page 481: ...tion time a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 482: ...ne data 1414 1415 and 1416 must be set in each case to the same value for interpolating axes Symmetrization reference model speed loop 1416 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 1 0 Active at once Input of symmetrization for the Speed control loop reference model This machine data simulates the calculation dead time of the speed control loop The simulation is in this case cal...

Page 483: ...ith the configured time constant Machining movements via the integrator in the case of non linear controlled system characteristics friction around the zero speed point can thus be restricted or prevented Note The integrator feedback is activated when MD 1421 is set to 1 0 Time constant speed setpoint filter 1502 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 500 ms Active at once Inp...

Page 484: ... input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Active at once This machine data allows reset 611D alarms to be concealed or disabled The alarm is active if the appropriate bit 0 All 611D alarms are activated as standard Bit 0 Configuration error cannot be concealed Bits 1 7 Not assigned Bit 8 Speed controller at fixed stop Bits 9 13 Not assigned Bit 14 Shutdown motor overtemperature Bit 1...

Page 485: ...t limit Upper input limit Units 200 0 600 V Active at once Input of DC link undervoltage warning threshold When the voltage drops below this value a message is sent to the SERVO This message is output on the 1st page of the FDD service display DC link off Timer speed controller at fixed stop 1605 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 200 20 10 000 ms Active at once Input of Speed...

Page 486: ...per output limit Units 0 0000 32 767 V Active at once This machine data is used to display the voltage level at the DC link in normal or set up mode The DC link voltage UDClink is measured continuously Motor temperature 1702 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 0000 32 767 C Active at once This machine data is used to display the motor temperature The motor temperature is me...

Page 487: ...um current of the power section e g with an 18 36A power section 100 36A RMS Significance current representation 1710 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 0 0 32 767 0 µA Active at once This machine data is used to display the significance of the current representation The significance of bit 0 internal current actual value representation is shown to the user to allow alloca...

Page 488: ...s assigned to the appropriate drive When the address is faulty the wrong module indicates the error Data version 1797 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 0 32 767 Active at once Output of current data version machine data list Firmware date 1798 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 0 32 767 Active at once Output of coded software version in decimal fo...

Page 489: ...nput limit Units 125 0 62 5 125 0 µs Active on Power On The basic clock cycle of the module is derived from the current controller clock cycle of the axis Current controller clock cycle Module basic clock cycle The module basic clock cycle is the basis for the generation of the interrupt signals for the processor and for the generation of the inverter signals of the pulse width modulator Other clo...

Page 490: ...rmitted parameterization error Exceeding the computing time on the speed controller clock cycle level is not permissible and will lead to tripping of the drive Monitoring cycle 1002 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100 000 4 000 100 000 µs Active on Power On The interrupt clock cycle is used for high priority monitoring purposes Note The input value for the clock cycle must ...

Page 491: ...Value limited to 2x the torque limit Always active with Travel to fixed stop Bit 5 15 Not assigned Caution Speed before current control is possible only with one active axis on the module The default is current before speed control bit 2 0 No encoder marks motor measuring system 1005 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 2 048 128 8 192 Incr rev Active on Power On Input of number...

Page 492: ...value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Active on Power On Input of the configuration for actual value functions related to the SIMODRIVE System 611D Value table Bit 0 Adaptation of direction of rotation gear encoder is fitted 0 Positive direction of rotation of motor clockwise 1 Negative direction of rotation of motor counterclockwise Bit 1 Phase error compensation 0 no...

Page 493: ...igned Enable motor switchover 1013 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 100 Hex Active on Power On Various motor switchover variants can be enabled The function motor switchover in the control means switchover between motor data set 1 MD 1xxx and 2 2xxx Possible switchover variants are Star delta switchover motor data set 1 star connection motor data set 2 delta connection S...

Page 494: ... CRC error on ENDAT interface 1 Check hardware cable encoder replace if necessary Bit 7 Bit 13 0 Check error 1 Check hardware cable encoder replace if necessary Bit 7 Bit 13 0 Error on correction of abs track through 1 incremental track Check hardware cable encoder replace if necessary Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 C D track in encoder EQN 1325 defective Switch on off replace encoder Bit 10 Protocol cannot...

Page 495: ...cremental encoder 1 absolute encoder with EnDat interface Bit 4 Design of the measuring system 0 rotary measuring system 1 linear measuring system Bits 5 13 Not assigned Bits 14 15 Transmission rate EnDat encoder 00 100 kHz 01 500 kHz 10 10 kHz 11 2 kHz Multiturn resolution absolute encoder direct measuring system 1031 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 4096 0000 65535 rev Act...

Page 496: ...it 11 SSI level detected on data line hardware Check encoder type replace Bit 12 TIMEOUT on reading measured value Repeat replace hardware Bit 13 CRC error Replace hardware Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 Encoder defective Replace encoder Frequency pulse width modulation 1100 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 4 000 3 200 2 000 8 000 Hz Active on Power On The frequency of the sampling ...

Page 497: ...rrent controller clock cycle for 611 D hardware a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 1101 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a TPBM 4 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 498: ...5 Motor no load voltage MSD MD 1136 Motor no load current MSD MD 1137 Stator resistance cold MSD MD 1138 Rotor resistance cold MSD MD 1139 Stator leakage reactance MSD MD 1140 Rotor leakage reactance MSD MD 1141 Main field reactance MSD MD 1142 Starting speed field weakening MSD MD 1143 Upper speed Lh characteristic MSD MD 1144 Gain factor Lh characteristic MSD MD 1146 Motor maximum speed FDD MSD ...

Page 499: ... x 1500 316 1PH4168 4NF2 x 1500 318 1PH2093 6WF4 1500 320 1PH2095 6WF4 1500 321 1PH2113 6WF4 1500 322 Order no Rated speed Motor code no nrated in rev min 1PH6133 4NG4 x 2000 113 1PH6135 4NF0 x 1500 114 1PH6135 4NF4 x 1500 115 1PH6135 4NG4 x 2000 116 1PH6137 4NF4 x 1500 117 1PH6137 4NG4 x 2000 118 1PH6138 4NF0 x 1500 119 1PH6138 4NF4 x 1500 120 1PH6138 4NG4 x 2000 121 1PH6161 4NF0 x 1500 122 1PH61...

Page 500: ... 425 Non Siemens motor 099 Motor table FDD motors Order no Rated speed Motor code no nrated in rev min 1FT6102 8AB7X XXXX 1500 1001 1FT6105 8AB7X XXXX 1500 1002 1FT6108 8AB7X XXXX 1500 1003 1FT6132 6AB7X XXXX 1500 1004 1FT6134 6AB7X XXXX 1500 1005 1FT6136 6AB7X XXXX 1500 1006 1FT6061 6AC7X XXXX 2000 1101 1FT6062 6AC7X XXXX 2000 1102 1FT6064 6AC7X XXXX 2000 1103 1FT6081 8AC7X XXXX 2000 1104 1FT6082...

Page 501: ... 1305 1FT6084 8AH7X XXXX 4500 1306 1FT6086 8AH7X XXXX 4500 1307 1FT6102 8AH7X XXXX 4500 1308 1FT6084 8SH7X XXXX 4500 1356 1FT6086 8SH7X XXXX 4500 1357 1FT6031 6AK7X XXXX 6000 1401 1FT6034 1AK7X XXXX 6000 1402 1FT6041 6AK7X XXXX 6000 1403 1FT6044 6AK7X XXXX 6000 1404 1FT6061 6AK7X XXXX 6000 1405 1FT6062 6AK7X XXXX 6000 1406 Order no Rated speed Motor code no nrated in rev min 1FT6064 6AK7X XXXX 600...

Page 502: ...ion of maximum motor current 1105 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100 0 100 Active at once Input of reduction factor for the maximum permissible motor current The maximum motor current MD 1104 is the reference value for the specified percentage Note This machine data is relevant for FDD drives only Power section code number 1106 Default value Lower input limit Upper input l...

Page 503: ...56 A 80 A 19 FDD 56 112 A 160 A 1A FDD 70 140 A 200 A 28 FDD 140 210 A 400 A as from SW 4 1 Transistor limit current power section 1107 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 200 0 1 0 500 0 A Active on Power On Input of maximum permissible current of power section This machine data is automatically parameterized for Siemens power sections by the machine data Power section code MD...

Page 504: ...he S6 duty cycle intermittent operation The input is an RMS value This machine data is automatically parameterized for Siemens power sections by machine data Power section code number MD 1106 The value entered must correspond to the S6 current specified on the rating plate of the appropriate MSD power section Caution This data must not be changed by the user after automatic presetting of its value...

Page 505: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 506: ...a is relevant only for FDD drives Motor moment of inertia 1117 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 0 0 32 0 SW 5 and higher kgm2 Active at once Input of motor moment of inertia as specified on the motor data sheet non Siemens motor or automatic parameterization using machine data Motor code number MD 1102 in motors without a holding brake Active on Power On until SW 6 Motor...

Page 507: ... value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 2000 0 0 0 8 000 0 µs Active at once Input of control quantity Integral action time of current controller or automatic parameterization initialization through operator action Calulate controller data Note Integral arm can be disabled by entering the value TN 0 Symmetr ref model current control loop up to SW 4 1124 Default value Lower input limit Upp...

Page 508: ...ation using machine data Motor code number MD 96 Note This data is relevant only for MSD drives Motor rated voltage 1132 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 380 0 0 0 5 000 0 V Active on Power On Input of motor rated voltage as specified on the motor data sheet non Siemens motor or automatic parameterization using machine data Motor code number MD 1102 Motor rated frequency 113...

Page 509: ...a Motor code number MD 1102 Note This data is relevant only for MSD drives Active on Power On until SW 6 Stator resistance cold 1137 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 0 0 120 0 Active at once Input of stator resistance cold as specified on the motor data sheet non Siemens motor or automatic parameterization using machine data Motor code number MD 1102 Note This data is re...

Page 510: ...t value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 0 0 1 000 0 Active at once Input of magnetizing reactance as specified on the motor data sheet non Siemens motor or automatic parameterization using machine data Motor code number MD 1102 Note This data is relevant only for MSD drives Active on Power On until SW 6 Speed at start of field weakening 1142 Default value Lower input limit Upper inpu...

Page 511: ...ng range the magnetizing inductivity Lh increases linearly from the saturated value at the speed at which field weakening begins to the unsaturated value at the upper limit speed of the Lh characteristic Graphic representation a a a a a a a a a a n a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 1142 a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 512: ...n Active at once Input of the maximum permissible speed of the motor or an automatic parameterization initialization is calculated or taken over and performed for this machine data through the operator action Calculate controller data on the basis of the machine data Motor rated speed MD 1400 x 120 for FDD and Motor maximum speed MD 1146 for MSD If the speed actual value is exceeded by more than 2...

Page 513: ... 0 rev min Active at once Above the set speed flux detection is active below the set speed a flux model is used The parameter default is set for Calculate controller data and should not be changed Note This machine data only applies to main spindle drives DC link fixed voltage 1161 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 600 0 as from SW 6 0 700 V Active at once By specifying a DC ...

Page 514: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 1191 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 1107 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 8 x a a a a a a a a 2 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 515: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 60 0 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 100 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 500 0 2 0 5 1 0 Example Band stop filter Specified Blocking frequency 1 kHz with 1 kHz bandwidth 0 Hz bandwidth numerator damping Band width a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 20 0 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 516: ... a a a a 100 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Blocking frequency a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 10 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Log a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 517: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Blocking frequency a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 10 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Log a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 1k a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 10 kHz a a a a...

Page 518: ...roller sampling time of MD 1000 62 5 µs we recommend that the natural frequency be changed to fo 3000 Hz to achieve an optimum dynamic response of the controller Damping current setpoint filter 1 1203 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 7 0 05 5 0 Active at once Input of damping for current setpoint filter 1 PT2 low pass The filter is activated via machine data MD 1200 No cur...

Page 519: ...activated via machine data MD 1200 No current setpoint filters and MD 1201 Type current setpoint filter Damping current setpoint filter 3 1207 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 0 0 05 5 0 Active at once Input of damping for current setpoint filter 3 PT2 low pass The filter is activated via machine data MD 1200 No current setpoint filters and MD 1201 Type current setpoint fi...

Page 520: ... MD 1210 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 2 x Tsampl I controller a a a a a a a a 1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 521: ...ed via machine data MD 1200 No current setpoint filters and MD 1201 Type current setpoint filter Note The maximum block frequency input value is limited by the sampling frequency of the servo control MD 1000 parameterization error a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 1213 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 522: ...e filter is activated via machine data MD 1200 No current setpoint filters and MD 1201 Type current setpoint filter Note The maximum block frequency input value is limited by the sampling frequency of the servo control MD 1000 parameterization error a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 1216 a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 523: ...1200 No current setpoint filters and MD 1201 Type current setpoint filter Note The maximum block frequency input value is limited by the sampling frequency of the servo control MD 1000 parameterization error a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 1219 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 524: ...o the normalized torque of the motor Since the power and breakdown torque limitations MD 1235 MD 1236 MD 1145 are active in the upper speed range this machine data is significant only in the lower speed range The default value is set such that the acceleration torque is active up to rated speed for feed drives and the rated torque up to rated speed for main spindle drives the power and breakdown t...

Page 525: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 526: ...g Calculate controller data The default values for machine data 1235 are calculated from the following formula MD 1104 FDD MD X235 x 100 MD 1118 100 is entered as the default setting for MSD The default settings are such that the output is limited to the rated value at speeds above rated speed in the case of feed drives the following formula is applied above rated speed Motor speed x acceleration ...

Page 527: ... value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 150 0 0 0 400 0 Active at once Input of maximum permissible motor current referred to the motor rated current In order to shorten the ramp up times it may be advisable to set the current limit to values higher than 100 and to increase the power and torque limits MD 1230 MD 1239 at the same time Note This machine data is relevant only for main spindl...

Page 528: ...a a a a a a a a 2nd filter inactive a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 529: ...he set time constant is used to smooth the motor load signal MD 1722 in order to obtain a steadier display Corner freq torque setp smoothing 1252 Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 100 0 0 0 8 000 0 Hz Active at once Input of 3dB corner frequency fo of torque setpoint smoothing function PT1 low pass for display purposes Time constant T1 of the PT1 filter is calculated from the...

Page 530: ...D 1401 Creep speed pulse suppression 1403 Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 0 0 2 0 0 0 7 200 0 rev min Active at once Input of creep speed for pulse suppression If the absolute speed actual value drops below the specified speed limit e g owing to cancellation of the controller enabling command in the course of a creep operation the pulses are suppressed by a software functio...

Page 531: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Motor coasts out Timer pulse suppression 1404 Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 100 0 5 000 0 0 0 100 000 0 ms Active at once Input of timer for pulse suppression by drive In the event of a fault in generator braking mode or with controller disabled the control pulses for the power section transi...

Page 532: ...nput value Upper input value Units 1 1 1 Active on Power On Input of speed controller type PI controller with speed setpoint smoothing PI or with reference model PIR Variant 1 can be parameterized by setting the appropriate filter machine data via a control structure Caution This machine data is relevant only for Siemens internal procedures P gain speed controller 1407 Default value Lower input va...

Page 533: ... in the lower speed range MD 1409 and the upper speed range MD 1410 are not subject to any mutual restrictions See machine data Adaptation lower speed threshold MD 1411 for diagram Notes Setting the integral action time to zero deactivates the appropriate speed range suppression of integral gain and integrator contents torque step changes cannot be precluded see also Note in MD 1410 MD 1409 is act...

Page 534: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 1410 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 1407 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 535: ...nto account Input 1 The adaptation function is active See machine data MD 1411 and MD 1412 for description Note The adaptation function is automatically activated by the Calculate controller data operation for main spindle drives Natural frequency reference model speed 1414 Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 0 0 0 0 8 000 0 Hz Active at once Input of natural frequency for the ...

Page 536: ... time of the speed control loop The simulation is in this case calculated as an approximation of an interrupted dead time The response of the reference model can in this way be matched to the controlled system response of the closed P controlled speed control loop Message nx for nact nx 1417 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 6 000 0 0 0 50 000 0 rev min Active at once Input o...

Page 537: ...nt static friction can be suppressed at the cost of a permanent position setpoint actual value difference Prevention of strain on rigidly coupled axes or spindles synchronous spindle Prevention of overshooting during positioning Note The integrator feedback is activated when MD 1421 is set to 1 0 Symmetr speed feedfwd ctrl channel 1424 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 0 ...

Page 538: ... up procedure completed signal is activated at the same time as the nset nact signal however it is locked in the active state until the next setpoint change even if the actual speed value leaves the tolerance band The Power up procedure completed signal is deactivated immediately if the setpoint changes Functionality in as from SW 6 As long as the control signals that the speed setpoint is being a...

Page 539: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 540: ...2 PT1 are available The adjustable filter parameters are entered in the appropriate machine data Applications The set speed filter type band stop filter is used to dampen axis specific resonant frequencies in the position control loop Depending on the requirement the function band stop filter can be set in three configurations Simple band stop filter MD 1514 MD 1517 and MD 1515 MD 1518 Band stop f...

Page 541: ...onstant for speed setpoint filter 2 PT1 low pass The filter is deactivated when the data is set to zero Natural frequency speed setpoint filter 1 1506 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 2 000 0 10 0 8 000 0 Hz Active at once Input of natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 1 PT2 low pass An entry of 10 Hz as the natural frequency of the low pass filter initializes the filt...

Page 542: ... Input of natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 2 PT2 low pass An entry of 10 Hz as the natural frequency of the low pass filter initializes the filter as a proportional element with a gain of 1 independently of the associated damping The filter is activated via machine data MD 1500 No speed setpoint filters and MD 1501 Type speed setpoint filter Note With interpolating axes the speed setpoi...

Page 543: ...a a a 180 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 544: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 1001 s Bandwidth speed setpoint filter 1 1515 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500 0 5 0 7 999 0 Hz Active at once Input of 3dB bandwidth for speed setpoint filter 1 band stop The filter is activated in machine data MD 1500...

Page 545: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a fz 900 Hz fbn 1800 Hz Dn 100 fbz 180 Hz Dz 10 fn 100 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a dB a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 5 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 4 k a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 20 0 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 60 0 a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 546: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 547: ... natural frequency for raising or lowering the amplitude response after the blocking frequency MD 1514 1517 The machine data MD 1520 MD 1521 are used to match different axis dynamic responses to a standard dynamic response low pass filter The standard dynamic response is based on that of the axis with the lowest resonant frequency Formula 1 s 2 fbz 2 fz 2 s2 1 2 fz 2 1 s 2 Dz 2 fz s2 1 2 fz 2 1 s ...

Page 548: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a fz 54 Hz Dz 10 fn 40 Hz Dn 70 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 549: ... activated if the appropriate bit 0 All 611D monitoring functions are activated as standard Value table Bit 0 Internal error cannot be concealed Bit 1 Space vector monitoring as from SW 5 FDD MSD Bit 2 Not assigned Bit 3 Not assigned Bit 4 Measuring circuit motor measuring system Bit 5 Absolute track monitoring Bit 6 Not assigned Bit 7 Not assigned Bit 8 Zero mark monitoring motor measuring system...

Page 550: ...ned Bit 12 Speed too high for system power up Bit 13 Temperature motor shutdown temperature Bit 14 Temperature motor shutdown timer Bit 15 Not assigned Note Reset 611D alarms can be acknowledged via a software reset Caution Concealing the reset alarms may result in irreparable damage to the power section or the motor Motor temperature warning threshold 1602 Default value Lower input limit Upper in...

Page 551: ...rning threshold When the voltage drops below this value a message is sent to the SERVO This message is output on the 1st page of the FDD service display DC link off Timer n controller at fixed stop 1605 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 200 0 20 0 10 000 0 ms Active at once Input of Speed controller at fixed stop timer The status of the current at the current setpoint limit i...

Page 552: ...ue higher than 0 is entered temperature measurement no longer has any effect The motor is operated at this fixed temperature Note The motor temperature monitoring function set in machine data MD 63 is made inoperative if a fixed temperature is specified Diagnosis functions 1610 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0001 0000 0003 Hex Active on Power On This machine data can ...

Page 553: ...ble reaction is selected the controller disable reaction is deactivated The default setting is dependent on the motor type FDD ˆ 0D3C MSD ˆ FFFF and is parameterized by the drive configuration during start up Note The MSD default setting FFFF must be selected when the FDD H option is used Caution The alarms may be deactivated or concealed through machine data MD 1600 Concealable alarms power ON i ...

Page 554: ...ctivated or concealed through machine data MD 1601 Concealable alarms reset i e they may be inactive Value table Bit 0 Pulse disable configuration error 1 on 0 off Bits 1 7 Not assigned Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 Pulse disable encoder limit frequency 1 on 0 off Bits 10 12 Not assigned Bit 13 Pulse disable abs motor encoder temperature 1 on 0 off Bit 14 Pulse disable on motor temperature warning 1 on 0 o...

Page 555: ...ace X or Y in the data RAM for violation of a threshold specified by the user A tolerance band can also be set for this threshold value which is taken into account when the threshold is scanned for violation This message is output via operational message with bit 5 and can be linked to a pickup or dropout delay The message function is executed in a 4 ms cycle Graphic representation Threshold Toler...

Page 556: ...inputs in machine data MD 1621 to MD 1624 while the monitoring function is already active MD 1620 bit 0 1 do not automatically result in re initialization i e reset to zero of message bit 5 If a bit reset is required the monitoring function must be deactivated and then re activated by means of MD 1620 bit 0 after the machine data has been altered Signal number variable message function 1621 Defaul...

Page 557: ...etpoint limit MD 1713 13 Capacity utilization mset mset limit 8000H ˆ 100 14 Active power 0 01 kW 15 Rotor flux setpoint MD 1712 16 Rotor flux actual value MD 1712 17 Cross voltage Uq MD 1709 18 Direct axis voltage Ud MD 1709 19 Current setpoint Id MD 1710 20 Motor temperature 0 1 o C 21 DC link voltage 1 V 22 Zero mark signal motor measuring system 23 Bero signal 24 Absolute actual speed value MD...

Page 558: ...ction see diagram under MD 1620 Note Depending on the setting of bit 2 in machine data Bits variable message function MD 1620 the numerical value entered in MD 1623 is interpreted either as an unsigned value bit 2 0 or a signed value bit 2 1 Hysteresis variable message function 1624 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 000000 000000 FFFFFF Hex Active at once Input of hysteresis ...

Page 559: ...a time monitoring function which is already in progress The monitoring function is initialized with the newly entered time data Response threshold ZWK monitor only 1630 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 550 0 600 V Active at once Input of response threshold of DC link voltage if the voltage drops below this value only the DC link voltage is monitored motor temperature monitor...

Page 560: ... G426 see Programming Guide 840C Response threshold emergency retraction 1634 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 400 0 580 660 as from SW 6 V Active at once Input of response threshold of DC link voltage if the voltage drops below this value emergency retraction responses are initiated according to the operating modes selected in machine data Drive modes emergency retraction M...

Page 561: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a This machine data is relevant only for Siemens internal purposes and must not be altered Delay time regenerative braking 1637 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 10000 ms Active at once Input of the time delay by which regenerative braking is delayed...

Page 562: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a This machine data is relevant only for Siemens internal purposes and must not be altered Emergency retraction speed 1639 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 4194304 4194304 rev min Active at once Input of the emergency retraction speed which is given as setpoint speed during the emergency retraction time MD 1638 in the case of a fa...

Page 563: ...effective only if signal number 0 is selected in MD 1651 signal number min max memory Diagnostic function Min max memory This function can be used to calculate the value range within which a specific memory location moves over a prolonged period The function is executed in the current controller cycle fastest cycle in order to ensure reliable detection of all system quantities The quantity to be m...

Page 564: ...the resulting Id current at nrated 5 causes a temperature rise in the drive and an additional increase in oscillation at high speeds If MD 1661 is set to a very low value the resulting Iq current value is too low making it impossible for the drive to follow the specified frequency An operating status message is transmitted to the SERVO by means of bit 28 in the status word The current and speed co...

Page 565: ...limit MD 1713 13 Capacity utilization mset mset limit see MD 1621 8000H ˆ 100 14 Active power 0 01 kW 15 Rotor flux setpoint MD 1712 16 Rotor flux actual value MD 1712 17 Cross voltage Uq MD 1709 18 Direct axis voltage Ud MD 1709 19 Current setpoint Id MD 1710 20 Motor temperature 0 1 o C 21 DC link voltage 1 V 22 Zero mark signal motor measuring system 23 Bero signal 24 Absolute actual speed valu...

Page 566: ... 1651 Caution This machine data is relevant only for Siemens internal purposes and must not be altered Minimum value min max memory 1653 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0000 0000 0000 0000 FFFF FFFF Hex Active at once Output of display value of min max memory minimum value Maximum value min max memory 1654 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0000 000...

Page 567: ...lay monitor MD 1657 Caution This machine data is relevant only for Siemens internal purposes and must not be altered Address memory location monitor 1656 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Active at once This machine data addresses the memory location offset address for the monitoring function MD 1656 defines the DSP address in conjunction with MD 1655 memor...

Page 568: ...elevant only for Siemens internal purposes and must not be altered Value acceptance monitor 1659 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 1 Active at once This machine data writes the value MD 1658 to the addressed memory location MD 1655 MD 1656 if the value 1 has been entered to initiate the write operation On completion of the write operation the machine data is automatically...

Page 569: ...4 only 1665 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 2 0 0 0 20 0 Active at once Note This machine data is relevant only for Siemens internal purposes and must not be altered Input of an operating time factor between interpolation and speed controller cycles for the ramp function generator During ramp up the acceleration rate determined by the ramp specification of the SERVO may be ...

Page 570: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a nset a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a t a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 0 nset nact a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 571: ...machine data is used to display the status of the binary inputs Value table Bit 0 Control unit enable internal module function including marking according to MD 1003 bit 5 Bit 1 Pulse enable terminal 663 module specific pulse suppression Bit 2 Pulse enable terminal 63 48 of I RF unit central drive pulse suppression Bit 3 Sum signal HW pulse enable Stored hardware sum signal Axial pulse enable by P...

Page 572: ...onverter times are greater than the ASIC cycle time This machine data is valid only for direct measuring systems Voltage setpoint effective as from SW 6 1705 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units Veff line to line Active at once Voltage setpoint display The signal can be output via DAC a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 573: ...output limit Upper output limit Units 0 0 100000 0 100000 0 Active at once This machine data is used to display the significance of the voltage representation The user is informed of the percentage significance of bit 0 so that he can assign the internal voltage status representation to the control setting of the pulse inverter The maximum actuating voltage is available internally in standardized ...

Page 574: ...ance of bit 0 so that he can assign the internal rotor flux status representation to the physical values in Vs The rotor flux scaling is available as an internal data Note This machine data is calculated only once during power up and from the power ON data after every motor switchover Significance torque representation 1713 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 0 100000 0 100...

Page 575: ... Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Active at once Display of the monitoring machine data Diagnosis speed actual value If an impermissibly large speed deviation occurs within the sampling period then the value of the machine data is incremented Sporadic responses by a few increments can be ignored since these do not influence the speed controller A high disturbance leve...

Page 576: ...P_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL must be large enough Note If for example the acceleration suffices to follow the setpoint ramp in the lower speed range but not in the upper range only the time during which the tolerance band was exceeded and not the ramp up time is displayed Diagnostics concentricity monitoring 1724 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 0 32767 Active at once Load test Whe...

Page 577: ...gnment Image ZK1 RES register 1732 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Active at once This machine data displays the internal ZK1 reset register The machine data Concealable alarms reset MD 1601 is not taken into account for MD 1732 Note This display value can only be reset through an NC reset process software reset See drive MD 1601 for bit assignment NPFK...

Page 578: ...of the indirect measuring system motor Value table 0 Voltage raw signals 1 7 Reserved Measuring circuit type direct measuring system 1791 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 1 32 767 Active at once This machine data displays the measuring circuit code number of the direct measuring system if one is inserted Value table 1 No measuring system present 0 Voltage raw signals 1 C...

Page 579: ...the 1st motor by a number not in their meaning the first number is 2 Example MD 1005 No of encoder marks motor measuring system 1st motor MD 2005 No of encoder marks motor measuring system 2nd motor The meaning of the MDs of the 2nd motor are identical to the MDs of the same name of the 1st motor see description for 1st motor MD No Motor 2 Title MD No Motor 1 2005 No encoder marks motor measuring ...

Page 580: ... 1150 2151 Integral action time flux controller 1151 2160 Speed for start of flux detection 1160 2191 Adaptation servo limit torque 1191 2230 1st torque limiting value 1230 2231 2nd torque limiting value 1231 2232 Switching speed from Md1 to Md2 1232 2233 Generative limitation 1233 2234 Hysteresis P 1232 1234 2235 1st power limit value 1235 2236 2nd power limit value 1236 2238 Current limit 1238 2...

Page 581: ...sage nx for nact nx 1417 2418 Message nmin for nact nmin 1418 2426 Tolerance band for nset nact message 1426 2602 Motor temperature warning threshold 1602 2607 Switchoff limit motor temperature 1607 2608 Fixed temperature 1608 2711 Significance speed representation 1711 2712 Significance rotor flux representation 1712 2713 Significance torque representation 1713 2714 Significance rotor position re...

Page 582: ...ed zero crossing when quadrant error compensation QEC is active The display is called by means of softkey Service QEC in the Circularity test menu Note This machine data is effective only if one of the two quadrant error compensation modes is active Compensation amplitude QEC as from SW 4 3001 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 99999 999 99999 999 Active at once This machine...

Page 583: ... softkey Service QEC in the Circularity test menu Note This machine data is effective only if one of the two quadrant error compensation modes is active 7 4 3 Diagnosis service MD data description as from SW 3 Drive configuration as from SW 4 10000 10014 100291 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Active on Power on The Drive configuration machine data conta...

Page 584: ...wer on The Power section code machine data contains the required or used amperages for the selected module according to the hexadecimal code number see also MD 1106 In the case of two axis modules the data contains two sets of information Machine data 10200 to 10214 are assigned to physical addresses 1 to 15 Data version as from SW 4 10900 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units ...

Page 585: ...ne data cyclical error block check contains 4 error counters for bus transmission errors between the NC and drive which have been detected by a hardware monitor Errors are detected by ASICs DCM DCS PCU 0 and PCU 1 which are involved in the transmission The error counters are reset after an NCK power on reset and cease to be incremented once they have reached their maximum value The machine data is...

Page 586: ...nternal system functions Status word 2 11003 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0000 FFFF Hex Active after ramp up of 611D link This machine data contains the high order status bits bits 16 31 of the cyclical status word at the interface between SERVO and 611D Bits 0 2 Set of actual parameters 0 to 7Dec Bit 3 Motor selection actual 0 star 1 delta Bit 4 Assigned to or reserve...

Page 587: ...system functions Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Ramp function generator rapid stop setpoint 2nd torque limit setpoint Speed setpoint smoothing setpoint 0 off 1 on Bits 12 15 Assigned to or reserved for internal system functions Status word 2 11005 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0000 FFFF Hex Active after ramp up of 611D link This machine data contains the high order status bits bit...

Page 588: ...etraction MD 1634 Emergency retraction generator mode active 0 off 1 on Bit 3 SW 4 Generator speed minimum speed 0 on 1 off Bits 4 13 Assigned to or reserved for internal system functions Bit 14 Bit 15 Motor temperature warning Heat sink temperature warning 0 off 1 on Status class 3 11007 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0000 FFFF Hex Active after ramp up of 611D link This...

Page 589: ...ting voltage Ustell d Umax Torque setpoint mset mlimit 0 off 1 on Bits 14 15 Assigned to or reserved for system internal functions Drive status 11008 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 5 Active at once This machine data defines the ramp up and operating status of the digital drives on an axis specific basis The status is generated during ramp up in the SERVO and updated ac...

Page 590: ...ue Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 327 68 327 67 kW Active at once This machine data specifies the active power of the digital drive Current actual value as from SW 4 11012 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 32 768 32 767 Active at once This machine data specifies the current actual value of the digital drive as a percentage 32768 32767 ˆ 200 200 The limit curren...

Page 591: ...ry axes NC MD 5640 5 and position control resolution NC MD 18000 0 3 The information is output in the drive service displays v max FDD n setpoint max MSD as from SW 4 12001 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units Active Position controller cycle as from SW 4 12002 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units Active Actual gear stage as from SW 4 12003 Default value L...

Page 592: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 593: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 594: ... limit Units DB 60 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 595: ...me base Factor OB 5 2 5 ms 1 to 3 OB 6 10 ms 1 to 9 OB 7 100 ms 1 to 255 You must not specify zero as a factor If you want to use OB 5 set PLC MD 6051 0 to 0 to enable OB 5 to be invoked See also PLC MD 6050 enable block for processing and PLC MD6048 processing delay Last STEP 5 timer 5 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 64 1 255 DB 60 DW 5 The processing of timers causes a ce...

Page 596: ...m obtains the information required from the relevant NC machine data and stores it in the data blocks DB60 and DB63 which means that the other PLC MD remain active the PLC processes only those channels spindles and axes actually defined via NC MD any changes in the number of channels spindles or axes will become effective only after a PLC restart Last byte to reset in input image 11 Default value ...

Page 597: ...cified as the number of PLC cycles that are allowed to elapse before the user interface UI is enabled and applies to all user interfaces on a PLC When the timeout has expired a negative acknowledgement is sent in response to a frame sent to the user interface Default value 1 i e the user interface must be free again after one PLC cycle Max input value 10 i e the user interface must be free again a...

Page 598: ...l sequence initiation 20 29 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units see table 0 255 DB 60 DW 20 29 Default value MD Value 20 25 21 26 22 30 23 29 0 0 See Computer Link Spare 31 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 1 127 DB 60 DW 31 No of interrupt byte on interface PLC PLC 135 WD 30 DB 60 DW 30 This tells the PLC operating system the number of the interrupt byt...

Page 599: ...ted over the command channel S external Coupled motion of axes with option 6FC5 150 0AS02 0AA0 Transmit with option 6FC5 150 0AD04 0AA0 Division increment Position specification M19 through several revolutions Start addresses of DMP submodules DMP IM lines 34 123 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units see table 1 254 DB 60 DW 34 123 DMP Distributed machine peripherals byte number ...

Page 600: ... 63 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PLC MD DB60 DW Interface MPC line No Te...

Page 601: ... 1 1 1 1 1 1 E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 64 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PLC MD DB60 DW Interface MPC line No Terminal block No PLC MD standard value Terminal block rotary switch position Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Rese...

Page 602: ...bytes The PLC outputs an error message and goes to STOP if illegal values are detected on a cold restart If enabled in PLC MD 6050 bit 3 bit 3 0 OB 3 is invoked when an alarm is generated Address 1st machine control panel 128 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 64 0 127 SW 4 and higher DB 60 DW 128 Address 2nd machine control panel 129 Default value Lower input limit Upper inpu...

Page 603: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 604: ...limit Units 0 DB 61 DW 90 For values and their meanings see the Package 0 description PLC MD values for computer link package 2096 to 2119 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 DB 61 DW 96 119 PLC MD values for tool management package 2120 to 2139 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 DB 61 DW 120 139 8 4 PLC MD for the user PLC MD values for user 4000 to 42...

Page 605: ...t value All bits default to 0 M DECODING WITH EXTENDED ADDRESS FOR NC CHANNEL 1 TO 4 Bit 0 No M decoding with extended address Bit 1 M decoding with extended address Note The relevant data block DB 80 DB 83 must be loaded to enable M decoding with extended address If the bit is set but the DB has not been loaded the PLC goes into the STOP loop for a list of errors see the Installation Lists After ...

Page 606: ...0000 0111 MD 6017 0000 0000 Use this MD to enable the signals of the axes between the NC and the PLC As the basic configuration of the 840T includes two axes bits 0 and 1 in MD 6016 must be set to 1 If there are more than two axes the corresponding bits must be set in this MD The highest axis number is specified in PLC MD 10 Fictitious axes for transformation option 6FC5 150 0AD04 0AA0 must also b...

Page 607: ...those channels signalling NC start inhibit DBs 10 13 D 16 15 Note The MD is not active when using the Overstore function With Overstore NC start is always prevented from becoming active in a non selected channel Bit 2 Access to PLC data over commands is disabled Bit 1 The command channel function is enabled The number of user interfaces is specified in PLC MD 33 See PLC MD 33 6029 DR 14 Signal T H...

Page 608: ...30 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 The error bits in the inactive channel DBs DB12 DB13 for channels 3 and 4 are also evaluated Note If an error bit is set in an inactive channel DB that is used for the extended display of error and operational messages then the corresponding errors are not included in the message group displays You are not permitted to assign PLC channels MD 6000 while the display of error and o...

Page 609: ...ion Error message evaluation when a DR8 bit is 1 PLC MD 6032 5 1 Bit 9 5 in channel 2 DB 11 results in output of error message number 6145 see PLC Installation Section 6034 DL 17 DR k 3 DL k 3 PLC MD DB63 DW No Bit No 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Alarm DB 31 Default value All bits default to 0 K 0 4 8 12 16 20 1st to 6th spindle Bit 0 The system software does not evaluate the bits in the corresponding interfac...

Page 610: ...6035 1 1 See PLC Installation Section 6036 DL 18 DR 4 DL 4 DR 3 DL 3 DR 2 DL 2 DR 1 DL 1 6037 DR 18 DR 8 DL 8 DR 7 DL 7 DR 6 DL 6 DR 5 DL 5 6038 DL 19 DR 12 DL 12 DR 11 DL 11 DR 10 DL 10 DR 9 DL 9 6039 DR 19 DL 16 DR 15 DL 15 DR 14 DL 14 DR 13 DL 13 PLC MD DB63 DW No Bit No 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Alarm DB 58 Alarm DB 58 Alarm DB 58 Alarm DB 58 Default value All bits default to 0 Bit 0 The system software...

Page 611: ...not evaluate the bits in the corresponding interface byte for operational messages Bit 1 The system software evaluates the bits in the corresponding interface byte for operational messages Notes 1 The bit applies to all NC channels 2 If the same bit is also set for error messages PLC MD 6032 6033 the PLC goes into the Stop loop Sample application DB 10 D 6 8 1 signal operational message 6000 PLC M...

Page 612: ...ample application DB 31 D 7 1 1 signal operational message 8029 PLC MD 6042 1 1 See PLC Installation Section 6043 DR 21 DR k 3 DL k 3 PLC MD DB63 DW No Bit No 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Signal DB 32 Default value All bits default to 0 K 0 4 8 12 116 1st to 30th axis Bit 0 The system software does not evaluate the bits in the corresponding interface byte for operational messages Bit 1 The system software eval...

Page 613: ...gnal DB 58 Signal DB 58 Signal DB 58 Default value All bits default to 0 Bit 0 The system software does not evaluate the bits in the corresponding interface byte for operational messages Bit 1 The system software evaluates the bits in the corresponding interface byte for operational messages Note If the same bit is also set for error messages PLC MD 6036 to 6039 the PLC goes into the Stop loop Sam...

Page 614: ...dard operations this bit must be 0 Bit 1 The exact cause of a time out QVZ is displayed as one item of precision error detection data 135 WB PLC Bus access or the STEP 5 program is slower The bus interface executes a write access to the link or local bus while the processor receives an acknowledgement and continues operation buffered access to local link bus Should a timeout occur during this type...

Page 615: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 616: ...C PLC 135 WD Reserved Default value 0 A signal change at an EU IM interrupt input triggers the interrupt that invokes OB 2 enable via PLC MD 6052 The signal edge i e positive or negative edge that is to trigger the interrupt can be specified separately for each interrupt input Bit 0 Positive edge triggers interrupt Bit 1 Negative edge triggers interrupt The system program checks the machine data f...

Page 617: ... panel Bit 0 The user can control the travel key LEDs Bit 1 The PLC operating system controls the travel key LEDs 6066 DL 33 Processing of direction keys for user TT machine 1st MCP present 6067 DR 33 Processing of direction keys for user TT machine 2nd MCP present PLC MD DB63 DW No Bit No 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1st machine control panel configuration 2nd machine control panel configuration Bit 0 Bit 1 M...

Page 618: ...t DMP interface module 2nd line bits 0 7 Edge for interrupt byte 2nd DMP interface module 1 1st line bits 0 7 Edge for interrupt byte 2nd DMP interface module 1 2nd line bits 0 7 Edge for distributed interrupt byte interface PLC PLC 135WD Bits 0 7 Reserved Bits 0 7 Enable for interrupt byte 1st DMP interface module 1st line bits 0 7 Enable for interrupt byte 1st DMP interface module 2nd line bits ...

Page 619: ...29 6088 DL 44 6089 DR 44 6090 DL 45 6091 DR 45 6092 DL 46 6093 DR 46 6094 DL 47 6095 DR 47 Processing of operational messages IA Byte No DB63 PLC MD 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Bit No 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Alarm DB 58 Alarm DB 58 Signal DB 58 Signal DB 58 Alarm DB 58 Signal DB 58 Signal DB 58 Alarm DB 58 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Baudrate for RS232 C V 24 interface on inte...

Page 620: ... 6419 Internal system bits Bit 0 must be set to 1 6480 6499 Internal system bits Bit 0 must be set to 1 MD No Bit No 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MD 6400 to 6574 without DB 8 6 PLC MD bits for function blocks FB bits 7000 to 7049 DW 0 DW 24 PLC MD DB64 DW No Bit No 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Default value All bits default to 0 Refer to the Tool Management and Computer Link literature for details 8 28 Siemens AG 1992 All ...

Page 621: ...of the bits set and to allocate machine specific option bits The user can then specify additional machine specific values Sample application A user builds machines with different turrets but wants to be able to provide a single program for all machines The turrets differ in the number of tool locations e g turret 1 has 6 turret 2 has 8 locations The program for each type of turret in this case a p...

Page 622: ...ersing range is free of obstacles Always enter the lowest possible traversing range limits The measuring function is aborted if the specified traversing range is exceeded For axes with an endless traversing range the traversing range monitoring function can be deactivated by entering 0 for the traversing range upper and lower limits The value 0 0 corresponds to zero traversing limits i e the trave...

Page 623: ...h actuation of the NC start hard key Use the request signal Traverse request drive test which is generated with selection of the measuring function in the PLC user program and the acknowledgement signal Motion enable drive test see Interface Description DB29 and DB31 S On Traverse request drive test switch on the control and enable the brake S Acknowledge the enabling of the control and brake with...

Page 624: ...it must be ensured that it cannot be released by electrical means Automatic quadrant The purpose of the quadrant error compensation function is to error compensation minimize contour errors resulting from friction backlash and with integrated torsional strain during reversal The following functions are provided with circularity test SW 4 to allow the detection and compensation of quadrant errors o...

Page 625: ...and Drive servo startup softkeys Note The Drive servo startup function takes approximately 30 s to load and is com mented with the flashing text Wait during loading Fig 9 1 Explanation The drive servo start up display machine configuration display provides an overview of the current axis spindle configuration and functions purely as a dis play see also description of machine configuration in machi...

Page 626: ...ara drive Display File functions Measure ment Meas paras Contr para drive Display File functions Measure ment Meas paras Contr para drive Display File functions Contr para NC Measure ment Signal paras Contr para drive File functions Contr para NC Learn Function paras Contr para drive Display File functions Contr para NC 9 Drive Servo Start Up Application as from SW 3 9 1 1 Selection of menu trees ...

Page 627: ... enables the measurement or the DAC output In order to start a measurement with traversing operation the traverse enabling commands set by means of toggle field from the PLC NC must be available This operator action is acknowledged by an appropriate message The measurement or the DAC output is enabled by selecting the Start softkey but can be disabled again with the Stop softkey The function is ab...

Page 628: ...used to read in a measuring parameter file with the softkey Load from disk In the basic display assigned to the measuring function in question and under the softkey Measuring parameters it is possible to change values before accepting them for another axis With the softkey Copy to clipboard the mea suring parameters are copied into the clipboard for the currently selected axis To ac cept the value...

Page 629: ... in the active display the active display can be switched over by means of the Home key This softkey is used to expand a diagram window horizontally The window is marked first with the X marker softkey and the Expand softkey then selected The display can be returned to its original form by selecting the Expand softkey again These softkeys can be used to display each of the diagrams as a full frame...

Page 630: ...d under the Contr para drive softkey with one exception Under the circularity test function the softkeys have remained as they were in SW 3 You can call up the graphic display of measurement results with this softkey Fig 9 3 You can enter the file function area by selecting this softkey Example for position control loop Fig 9 4 9 Drive Servo Start Up Application as from SW 3 9 1 2 Softkeys ...

Page 631: ...ct the Accept configuration function with this softkey Explanation On pressing this softkey changes to the Power On data relevant for start up e g position speed controller cycle time are transferred Notes This softkey function must be activated after NCK reset Power On or after Drive Off On when the start up application is active acceptance of the configuration is also requested The configuration...

Page 632: ...ignals staircase function to stimulate the control loops as well as noise signals for spectral analysis using external equipment The parameters of drives or position control can be accessed at any time the application need not be terminated for this purpose Frequency response In addition to the usual method of optimizing control loop parameters which is measurement based on the transient response ...

Page 633: ...hose obtained at higher traversing speeds owing to backlash or static friction By decreasing the bandwidth you can increase the frequency resolution particularly at low frequencies After evaluating the measurement series which takes between 5 and 20 s depending on the MMC CPU you can call up the result as a Bode diagram under the Display softkey X marker Y marker Expand Picture 1 Picture 2 x lin l...

Page 634: ...oller frequency response always causes overshoots on the contour 9 2 1 Current control loop axis and spindle as from SW 3 You can select the measuring function for the current control loop with this soft key Note Test measurements on the current control loop can be performed on digital feed and main spindle drives with SW 4 and higher With SW 3 this function can still only be applied to digital fe...

Page 635: ...suitable of function generator S Bandwidth Input of maximum amplitude of test signal Values corresponding to approxi mately 5 of power section current are suitable max band width fsampl 2 1 2 x tsampl e g 4 KHz for 2 axis modules 125 ms current controller sampling time 8 KHz 4 KHz for single axis module 62 5 ms 125 ms depending on current controller sampling time S Averaging operations The normal ...

Page 636: ...anical frequency response nact Iqact as from SW 5 Setpoint step change Disturbance step change The actual speed value of the active measuring system is the measured quantity The enable commands must be implemented internally or with PLC or with PLC without NC as from SW 4 The following applies to the upper and lower traversing range limits The specified limit values define the permissible traversi...

Page 637: ...articular care must be taken to prevent resonance within the speed controller limit frequency range You can select the menu with the parameters for measuring the speed control loop with this softkey Notes You enter the measurement parameters in the selected display These parame ters are managed internally as configuration data rather than machine data i e they initialized when the machine runs up ...

Page 638: ... and offset A settling time of more than zero 0 1 2 s should be entered for frequency response measurements in order to take measurements under steady state conditions interference in the amplitude and phase response may otherwise occur as a result of transient behaviour D 2nd measurement type Interference frequency response up to SW 4 4 Mechanical frequency response nact Iqact as from SW 5 To eva...

Page 639: ... trigger time is limited to the settling time Measurement S Amplitude parameter settings This parameter determines the magnitude of the specified disturbance step change S Offset The step is stimulated from standstill or starting from the constant traverse speed set in this parameter As from SW 6 S The offset is reached along an acceleration ramp S The acceleration value is defined for an axis MD ...

Page 640: ... the measuring function for the position control loop with this soft key Notes Test measurements on the position control loop axis and spindle can be performed on both analog and digital drives The spindle measuring system spindle encoder must be defined or declared NC MD 5200 2 for the spindle Explanation Three different types of measurement are available for testing the speed control loop Freque...

Page 641: ...n improve ment then the setpoint can be rounded by means of a smoothing filter The effects of this filter can be checked in the test functions in the time range step and ramp stimulation You can select the menu with the parameters for measuring the position control loop with this softkey Note You enter the measurement parameters in the selected display These parame ters are managed internally as c...

Page 642: ...easuring the speed control loop with this softkey Notes You enter the measurement parameters in the selected display These parameters are managed internally as configuration data rather than machine data i e they are not initialized when the machine runs up Data can be input in two different ways S Manual input S Input by loading of an existing complete data set with the aid of file functions A fi...

Page 643: ...timulated during traversal The displayed position ac tual value does not include this speed offset The effect of the setpoint smoothing filter can be checked on the basis of the position setpoint characteristic You can select the menu with the parameters for measuring the position control loop with this softkey Note You enter the measurement parameters in the selected display These parame ters are...

Page 644: ...e machine is switched on The current axis spindle position is displayed in the position actual value absolute position field The scaling can also be altered when the function generator is in operation This is done by entering the normalization factor and confirming the input with the Start softkey bar When a normalization value of 100 is entered the function generator generates precisely the ampli...

Page 645: ...y the following signal parameters S Amplitude Amplitude 1 This parameter determines the magnitude of the specified setpoint step change S Amplitude 2 This parameter is significant only for the staircase signal form It determines the maximum signal amplitude see waveforms of signal types S Offset In the disturbing torque speed setpoint speed loop speed setpoint position loop and position setpoint o...

Page 646: ...toring takes place in operation or when the function is started Interdependencies The following parameters are also mutually interdependent S Band width Hz Band width 1 2 x sampling time s S Period ms Period 6 x sampling time ms S Pulse width ms 0 pulse width period with function generator Note The user should generally apply the input values which are recommended for these functions He must howev...

Page 647: ... Reset T1 Period T2 Pulse width A Amplitude O Speed offset Explanation While starting and braking is in progress the speed setpoint is output with a de lay via a filter The speed setpoint amplitude acts in relation to the set speed off set The axis spindle is traversed at the set amplitude during period T1 Period The amplitude is output with the opposite sign during period T2 pulse width D Sawtoot...

Page 648: ... A1 E2 Fig 9 8 Conditions Operating mode Speed setpoint position controller cycle Signal type Staircase E1 Switch on instant NC Start hardkey E2 Switch off instant e g NC Reset T1 Period A1 Amplitude 1 A2 Amplitude 2 O Speed offset Explanation Starting and braking are implemented with a delay via a filter The amplitude changes in cyclical operation are output in step form Amplitudes A1 and A2 are ...

Page 649: ...haracteristic Erläuterung The axis spindle is traversed at the constant speed offset during the setting time and after ramping according to the position ramp The speed setpoint increases during the position ramp time The acceleration set in the NC MD generally applies to the signal waveform of the speed characteristic To obtain the above signal waveform a very high value must be set in this NC MD ...

Page 650: ...ent time A Amplitude O Speed offset Note Set acceleration is lower speed characteristic Explanation The setpoint characteristic is the same as that in the ramp 1 diagram except that the drive acceleration has been reduced The position setpoint transitions during speed changes are therefore softer The speed is influenced by the values set in the NC MD S Spindle MD 4780 MD 4850 S Axis MD 2760 9 Driv...

Page 651: ...l type Step change ESD Settling time MD Measurement time A Amplitude O Speed offset Explanation On expiry of the settling time the speed setpoint is increased abruptly by the am plitude value from the offset On expiry of the measurement time the setpoint signal is removed and the speed setpoint reduced to zero with a delay via a filter 9 Drive Servo Start Up Application as from SW 3 9 3 3 Signal w...

Page 652: ...ange ESD Settling time MD Measurement time A Amplitude O Speed offset Explanation During the settling period and on completion of the position step change the drive is operated with the specified speed offset On expiry of the settling time the position amplitude is switched through to the position controller input within one cycle 9 Drive Servo Start Up Application as from SW 3 9 3 3 Signal wavefo...

Page 653: ... controller cycle Signal type Sawtooth E3 Change in scaling value by user e g from 65 to 100 A Amplitude Explanation A new scaling value is input via the Start softkey at instant in time E3 The resul tant increase in amplitude is not input as a sudden step change but is delayed via a filter 9 Drive Servo Start Up Application as from SW 3 9 3 3 Signal waveforms of function generator as from SW 3 10...

Page 654: ...llowing features SW 3 S 8 bit resolution S 3 DACs on each feed drive module single and two axis module S Each main spindle module is provided with 2 DACs and a special purpose test socket This test socket outputs a voltage which is proportional to the cur rent actual value of phase R see Table Module Scaling Test socket IR 8 10 16 A 25 A 8 25 V 24 32 32 A 50 A 8 25 V 30 40 51 A 75 A 8 25 V 45 60 7...

Page 655: ...ive selection and speci fication of the axis spindle name The offset input values must make allowance for the output range of the analog voltage signal The 611D drive module DACs have an output range of 2 5 V to 2 5 V Since the DAC resolution is limited 8 bits a window can be placed over the output value by means of the shift factor i e the signal output is decreased normalization when a negative ...

Page 656: ...D speed current controller signals or an S MSD speed SW 4 current controller signals the drive drive number which is to be measured must be selected for the output The Axis spindle input field has no function in this case Note S It is not possible to save the DAC configuration with Load save all for com plete backup nor is it possible to load a boot file via the File function S The DAC boot file s...

Page 657: ...in this list Selection list for axes Following error SERVO Absolute setpoint IPO Speed setpoint Part actual value Part setpoint IPO cycle Contour deviation Following error IPO cycle Absolut value modulo Part setpoint FIPO input Absolute setpoint LR Part setpoint FIPO output Selection list for axes Part actual value 2nd MS spindle encoder and spindles SERVO Part actual value 1st MS C axis encoder S...

Page 658: ...ror SERVO signals for axes Contour deviation Abs compensation value SERVO signals for Speed setpoint present spindles Speed setpoint RFG output Speed actual value Special SERVO signals Part actual value 1st MS Part actual value 2nd MS Following error IPO cycle Position control difference IPO cycle Absolute value modulo Part setpoint IPO cycle Part setpoint FIPO input Absolute position setpoint PC ...

Page 659: ... Shift factor 16 Bero signal DC link voltage Rotor position signal in 10 000 format with extrapolation as from SW 6 Voltage setpoint as from SW 6 Current setpoint as from SW 6 Notes The zero mark signal is connected to bit 7 The cam bero signal is connected to bit 11 for a 24 bit data word width this means a shift factor of 11 You can select the SIEMENS Service 2 function with this softkey The SIE...

Page 660: ...the quadrant error compensation is to carry out a circu larity test With a circularity test deviations from the programmed radius when a circle is described can be measured and displayed graphically must especially at the quadrant transition points To obtain an optimum compensation in the whole working range of the friction feedforward control the compensation dependancy on the acceleration must a...

Page 661: ...ing traversal of the circle this time is calculated on the basis of the radius and feed values It is also possible to parameterize the mode in which measurement results are represented via programmed radius or mean radius and the resolution scaling of diagram axes These inputs are used by the MMC to prepare representation of the measured values in the form of a circle diagram If the measurement ti...

Page 662: ...ontr para NC are made avail able to allow direct access to the controller parameters required These softkeys lead to the list input displays for the NC and drive controller ma chine data The appropriate axes must be selected in these displays by means of vertical softkeys Axis and Axis or Drive and Drive The machine data required for the conventional quadrant error compensation are also contained ...

Page 663: ...s a basis the set ting can be assessed this value should be as low as possible SW 4 You can call the graphic representation of the circularity test by means of this softkey Fig 9 18 Explanation This display shows the measured characteristic of the two axis position actual values in the form of a circle with the resolution selected by the user The mean radius or the programmed radius the programmed...

Page 664: ...mat with software version 3 0 and higher Note Measurement results can also be written to a file using the hardcopy function and output by means of Services functions SW 5 You can switch to graphic representation of the contour with this softkey Fig 9 19 Explanation The contour is shown without any distortion if the value 0 is entered in the field Resolution If suitable radius and feedrate values a...

Page 665: ...ion feedforward control without adaptation MD 1804 bit 6 1 is derived Two parameters compensating amplitude and compensation time constant can be altered These two parameters are each increased or decreased until the de viations from the programmed radius become minimal or have completely disap peared in the circularity test at the quadrant transition point Figs 9 20 to 9 24 A starting value of a ...

Page 666: ...litude radius deviations from the programmed radius at the quadrant crossover points have insufficient compensation see Fig 9 21 II Counter 2 Counter 1 I III IV Fig 9 21 Radius deviations at the quadrant crossover points with insufficient compensa tion If the compensating amplitude is too high the circularity test clearly shows the overcompensation of the radius deviations at the quadrant crossove...

Page 667: ...rom the programmed ra dius again occur immediately after see Fig 9 23 II Counter 2 Counter 1 I III IV Fig 9 23 Compensation time constant too small If the value for the compensation time constant chosen for the circularity test is too high we see that the radius deviation at the quadrant transition points is com pensated for it is assumed that the optimum compensating amplitude has been found but ...

Page 668: ...and velocities the average value of the derived time constants is used If it has been possible to achieve a good result with these time constants and the constant compensating amplitude across the whole working range i e for all re quired radii and velocities and for positioning characteristic adaptation MD 1804 bit 7 is no longer needed 9 Drive Servo Start Up Application as from SW 3 9 5 3 Conven...

Page 669: ...ly there should be a sufficient number of points for high velocities with small radii The characteri stic values are most easily derived from a graphic representation The acceleration values are derived from a v2 r from the radius and travel velocity The acceleration value can easily be varied using the override switch Before entering these acceleration values a3 a2 and a1 in machine data 1244 124...

Page 670: ...ristic break point a1 1 11 mm s2 a2 27 78 mm s2 a3 695 mm s2 The position control resolution 0 5 10 4 mm was selected resulting in 1000 units MS 1 mm The characteristic break points are therefore a1 11100 units s2 a2 277800 units s2 a3 6950000 units s2 The following values must therefore be entered in the machine data in the given order MD 1252 695 MD 1248 2778 MD 1244 111 If unsatisfactory result...

Page 671: ...drant transition are actually detected by the measur ing system This means that a direct measuring system an indirect measuring system with distinct load reactions on the motor rigid mechanical construc tion low backlash or appropriate compensation systems must be available In the case of indirect measuring systems the backlash compensation func tion should be applied to compensate any backlash S ...

Page 672: ...rmula Amount of memory space c x q 1 A maximum of 1000 memory locations are reserved for each axis affording suffi cient resolution even when a high degree of accuracy is required Two quantities are used to determine quantization since fine quantization c has a further function in addition to its role in determining the interval sizes A high fine quantization setting results in a similar output va...

Page 673: ... from the diagram shown above while having a very uniform shape in one or both of the other ranges The characteristic can be checked by selecting the Display softkey D Saving and loading NQEC data The MDD functions Save all and Load all have been extended to include the NQEC functions With Save all the NQEC parameterization including the measured values are read from the NCK servo and stored in th...

Page 674: ...standard data is available on the MMC for the parameters parameters described under the Function parameters softkey its purpose is to facilitate the start up procedure The start up engineer can load these data by selecting softkey File functions or he can as an alternative enter the parame ters individually The value for parameter Max acceleration must be entered according to re quirements i e the...

Page 675: ...mmediately by means of a circularity test Storage of information On completion of the learning process the compensation data must be saved in learned a boot file by means of file functions This file is loaded after power ON by means of a file transfer from the MMC to the neuronal network The file functions also allow the data to be stored in user files which can also be loaded to the neural networ...

Page 676: ...ot observed then error message QEC bits not set is output When the automatic learning process is started a check is also made whether the speed feedforward control is parameterized and activated If this is not the case the function is aborted with error message 160106 Feedforward control not activated For safety reasons the user must still select the enabling commands set in the toggle field after...

Page 677: ...on parameter S Max acceleration a3 settings This parameter defines the upper limit of the operating range Values of 0 may be entered The default setting after Load default is 500 mm s2 S Lower range limit a1 This parameter defines the limit of the lower acceleration range Values of 0 and 100 may be entered The default setting after Load default is 2 S Medium range limit a2 This parameter defines t...

Page 678: ...t ween 1 and 41 may be entered The default setting after Load default is 15 S Detailed learning This parameter determines whether the detailed learning function is selected or not The states yes or no may be selected The default setting after Load default is no D Parameter transfer This softkey is required to transfer manually changed data Additional information All NC machine data of the selected...

Page 679: ...is also included the measuring time must be reduced S If vibrations are contained in the following error at the time of the passage through zero they must be eliminated by trying other control settings A very high position setpoint smoothing can only be considered a solution during the automatic learning stage Conditions can also be improved by reducing the measuring time Table Possible errors and...

Page 680: ...on rate than the parameterized operating range is detected then the injection amplitude which was calculated for the parameterized maximum operating range is applied At high acceleration rates this injection value remains relatively constant Influencing the period of As described under Learning process the test signal for Detailed learning the learning phase is derived from the parameterized accel...

Page 681: ...ed then limits a1 and a2 from the diagram Storage utilization by means of variable node distance will likewise be lower in absolute terms since they are parameterized as a of the maximum acceleration These parameters should then be set to slightly higher values Ho wever a1 should not exceed the range corresponding to approximately 5 of the maximum acceleration 40 to 75 of the maximum acceleration ...

Page 682: ...x 2 50 mm s2 must be set to a value corresponding to three times the decay time The error measuring time must be adapted for the very high or very low accelera tion ranges The time is adapted automatically according to the characteristic in the diagram below In this case a value corresponding to 6 times the decay time is set for the error measuring time at low acceleration rates tM1 while double t...

Page 683: ...must be applied and NC MD 13720 must therefore be set to 900 Notes The error measuring time is required to produce the error criterion of the neural quadrant error compensation function This error criterion is also made available under the Circularity Test in display Service QEC in order to facilitate parameter ization of the conventional quadrant error compensation function To ensure that the err...

Page 684: ...ata Possible causes for this error message are S Activation of neuronal QEC NC MD 18120 bit 0 without valid parameter set tings for function parameters This parameterization error is also indicated on power ON if the start up results have not been saved in the boot file S Activation of neuronal QEC NC MD 18120 bit 0 with learning rate setting of 0 or learning rate parameterized as 0 NC MD 13680 wh...

Page 685: ...race settings and measurement curves The SERVO trace function is integrated on the highest menu tree level of the drive servo start up application since the 4 trace buffers offer 4 global resources which can be applied to any NC axis or spindle comparable to the 4 DAC chan nels of the mixed I O module Selection The SERVO trace display can be called by means of softkeys Diagnosis Start up and Drive...

Page 686: ...ntered here If the measurement has commenced and the trigger condition is fulfilled before the set pre trigger time has elapsed then the pre trigger range is dis played in an appropriately shortened form in the measurement curve The trace functions are initiated through selection of softkey Start This key starts all trace functions with valid signal selection When the function is activated the rec...

Page 687: ...value 2nd MS Following error IPO cycle Absolute value modulo Part setpoint FIPO input Absolute position setpoint PC Part setpoint FIPO output Part compensation value FIPO output Part compensation value FIPO input Leading axis total actual value link Leading axis total all leading axes Leading axis total active Angular offset mech coupling Position setpoint PC cycle Absolute actual value PC cycle Q...

Page 688: ...nals are not explained here The SIEMENS Service 3 softkey function is relevant only for SIEMENS servicing procedures and should be used only after consultation via the hotline Fig 9 36 Physical addresses can be defined in this display The toggle field Module type has been extended to include NCK from SW 5 9 Drive Servo Start Up Application as from SW 3 9 6 1 Selection of measured signal ...

Page 689: ...ction by selecting this softkey Follow g error Part setpt Fig 9 37 Explanation Two SERVO trace signals are output in this display The trigger is shown as a vertical broken line Note The displayed measurement results can be transferred to the MMC for storage as a file by means of softkey File functions 9 Drive Servo Start Up Application as from SW 3 9 6 2 SERVO trace display ...

Page 690: ...can be set separately for each display to automatic display format is automatically scaled by value range in trace buffer or to manual When manual is selected the required resolution and the offset must be entered in the appropriate input fields The au tomatic setting provides an optimum visual display of the measured characteristic between the maximum and minimum values of the measured curve The ...

Page 691: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 692: ...ts in a defined timebase position control and interpolation cycles All other control activities display input etc are dealt with a lower priority by the operating system The value displayed for the NC CPU utilization when the control is in the reset state and no operator actions are being performed is the basic CPU utilization The user can influence this basic utilization of the NC CPU by setting ...

Page 693: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 694: ... for each axis Measuring system resolution Set via MD for each axis The measuring system resolution is used for adapting the axes to the measuring system 10 2 2 Input display and position control resolution The input resolution for the entire control is defined in MD 5002 bits 4 to 7 The input resolution defines the geometry resolution for linear and rotary axes Rotary axes have the same input res...

Page 695: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 696: ...1 X 0 5 Geometry resolution Unit system MD 5002 bits 4 7 Pos control resolution MD 1800 bits 0 3 Contouring error calculation M Set speed resolution DAC 1 8192 Drive control X 4 Display resolution MD 1800 bits 4 7 Display Service display Measuring system resolution MD 364 MD 368 10 6 Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 AA50 SINUMERIK 840C IA ...

Page 697: ...t 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Pos contr resol 0 0 0 0 10 1 mm degr 0 5 x 10 1 degr 1 0 0 0 10 2 mm degr 10 2 mm degr 0 5 x 10 2 mm degr 0 1 0 0 10 3 mm degr 10 3 mm degr 0 5 x 10 3 mm degr 1 1 0 0 2 x 10 4 mm degr 0 0 1 0 10 4 mm degr 10 4 mm degr 0 5 x 10 4 mm degr 1 0 1 0 10 5 mm degr 10 5 mm degr 0 5 x 10 5 mm degr 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 10 1 degr 0 5 x 10 1 degr 1 0 0 1 10 2 degr 0 5 x 10 2 degr 0 1 ...

Page 698: ... xy x inch 2 x 10 5 inch x x x x x x x x inch 0 5 x 10 5 inch degr x x x x xy xy xy x x linear axes only y rotary axes only xy linear and rotary axes linear and rotary axes illegal 2 standard machine data Note Excessive differences between position control resolution and input resolution ought to be avoided For example an input resolution of 10 2 mm together with a position control resolution of 0...

Page 699: ...ity The input resolution determines not only the path resolution but also the lowest programmable velocity The lowest programmable velocity is always 10 times greater than the path resolution For example if the input resolution is 10 4 the lowest programmable velocity is then 10 3 mm min Depending on the unit system used the feedrate is interpreted either in mm min or in inches min If one of the i...

Page 700: ...inch degrees 0 00001 inch min degrees min The maximum axis velocity is only dependent on the input resolution with the SINUMERIK 840C Input resolution Maximum axis velocity NC MD 540 6 0 mm min 10 2 mm degrees 99 999 000 mm min degrees min 10 3 mm degrees 10 737 400 mm min degrees min 10 4 mm degrees 1 073 740 mm min degrees min 10 5 mm degrees 107 300 mm min degrees min 10 3 inch degrees 99 999 0...

Page 701: ...mmed using the CL 800 command in SEN or the command 410 alarm 3040 Field variable cannot be displayed is issued 10 2 7 Maximum velocity for thread cutting In the case of threading blocks G33 G34 and G35 the feedrate is calculated from the spindle speed and the pitch rather than being based on the programmed linear feedrate This feedrate determines the tool path feedrate for the threading block Con...

Page 702: ...s carried out independently of machine data 556 bit 5 Working area limitation software limit switch active To avoid exceeding the working area the absolute position is compared with the range limits This comparison only has to be carried out if the software limit switch working area limitation are not active because when they are the traversing range is not exceeded This check is not carried out o...

Page 703: ... 10 1 degrees 99999 9 degrees inches 0 5 10 2 degrees 999999 99 degrees 99999 99 degrees inches 0 5 10 3 inches degrees 253999 99 mm 9999 999 inches 99999 999 degrees 253999 99 mm 9999 999 inches 99999 999 degrees 107374 18 mm 9999 999 inches inches 0 5 10 4 inches degrees 253999 99 mm 9999 999 inches 9999 999 degrees 253999 99 mm 9999 9999 inches 9999 9999 degrees 107374 18 mm 9999 9999 inches 99...

Page 704: ...s 9999 9999 mm 393 70078 inches 9999 9999 degrees 9999 9999 mm 393 70078 inches 9999 9999 degrees mm 0 5 10 5 degrees 999 99 degrees 999 999 degrees 999 9999 degrees 999 99999 degrees Unit system Position control resolution Input resolution 10 3 inches degrees 10 4 inches degrees 10 5 inches degrees 10 6 inches degrees mm 0 5 10 1 degrees mm 0 5 10 2 mm degrees 99999 99 mm 3937 007 inches 99999 99...

Page 705: ...n the case of endlessly rotating rotary axes NC MD 572 bit 2 0 the control automatically switches the service display from the maximum positive value to the maximum negative value plus compensation factor when the 32 bit limit 1073741 824 degrees ˆ 2982 61 revolutions at a resolution of 10 3 degrees is reached 10 2 10 Influence on the modes function Increment mode In Increment mode the machine tra...

Page 706: ... used to shift control zero to an arbitrary point in the machine coordinate system The Preset offset may comprise no more than 8 decades plus sign An alarm is issued if more than 8 decades are entered The following value ranges must be observed when specifying a preset value for rotary axes Input resolution Value range 10 2 degr 0 359 99 10 3 degr 0 359 999 10 4 degr 0 359 9999 10 5 degr 0 359 999...

Page 707: ...PO time and the input resolution The table shows the maximum product that can be defined for spindle speed pitch IPO ms Maximum product with IR mm inches 10 3 10 4 10 5 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 120000 12000 1200 100000 10000 1000 85000 8500 850 75000 7500 750 65000 6500 650 55000 5500 550 52000 5200 520 Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 AA50 10 17 SINUMERIK 840C IA ...

Page 708: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 709: ...on control system is installed the actual position must be checked before the setpoint position is optimized The following must be clarified before beginning work Travel direction of the feed axis as per customer specification or in accordance with the ISO standard Polarity of the set speed voltage on the control unit for axis movements in a positive direction as per customer specification or asce...

Page 710: ... mm actual value display on NC monitor Is actual value display on NC monitor being incremented Bit 2 of NC MD 564 0 Move feed axis mechanically in pos direction Bit 1 of NC MD 564 0 Bit 1 of NC MD 564 1 Axis specific closing of the position control loop Bit 2 of NC MD 564 1 Check NC MD 364 368 and 1800 10 20 Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 AA50 SINUMERIK 840C IA ...

Page 711: ...e watched during the traversing operation The tacho compensation at the drive must be continued until the speed setpoint is approx 0 9 V The voltage 0 9 V corresponds to a speed setpoint display of 737 VELOS or 900 0 01 Fine tacho compensation analog only The axis must then be traversed at maximum velocity A speed setpoint of approx 9 V or 7373 VELOS or 900 0 01 results This displayed value must b...

Page 712: ...6 or 9500 is entered in MD 260 for analog only Maximum speed setpoint The maximum value to be output as the speed setpoint is defined with MD 268 maximum speed setpoint If the limit is exceeded alarm 104 DAC monitor has responded is triggered The internal speed setpoint is also monitored If the speed setpoint set is too high alarm 156 Speed setpoint alarm limit activated is triggered The alarms ap...

Page 713: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 714: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 715: ...he set maximum value has been selected correctly use the dynamically most unfavourable axis that contributes to continuous path control Measure the setpoint voltage nset to the speed controller with an oscillomink ink jet plotter storage oscilloscope or with the integrated servo start up function Section 9 Traverse at various feedrates n set V n set V t ms t ms Especially deceleration can be obser...

Page 716: ...ons if the drift is compensated Subsequently check the input KV factor of all axes on traversing with reference to the following error display Exact continuous path control requires that the dynamic behaviour of the axes is the same i e the same following error must occur at the same speed In the event of discrepancies the differences must be compensated at the multgain or speed actual value poten...

Page 717: ...efly but this must occur only in the rapid traverse range Speed control and current control must be back within the normal range current limit not attained before the rapid traverse rate or position has been reached Relation between acceleration and actual current Example of a well chosen acceleration value In this example the current limit is reached recognizable by the fact that the actual curre...

Page 718: ...al load on the machine and drive Reduction in vibration of the machine system Improvement of the movement of machine parts with a high breakdown torque Description of function With a jerk controlled interpolator the velocity is increased and reduced by a constantly changing acceleration At the beginning of the acceleration and braking phase the acceleration value is increased from zero to the maxi...

Page 719: ...culated as follows a 0 5 0 5 m 100 TIPO s 0 005 m min m s2 TIPO m s TIPO 0 3 In the table below a movement from zero speed is assumed Constant maximum acceleration takes place In the 8th to 10th IPO cycle Then the acceleration is reduced to zero again with jerk limitation After 17 IPO cycles a velocity of 24 m min is reached and a constant travel phase follows Time ms 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10...

Page 720: ...uld be at least double the maximum following error deviation at zero speed Zero speed monitoring NC MD 212 The machine manufacturer must try to keep the position deviation to a minimum i e under the exact stop tolerance range set in NC MD 204 to 208 The value specified for zero speed monitoring NC MD 212 should be approximately double that entered in NC MD 204 to 208 Alarm 112 is triggered if one ...

Page 721: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Tolerance band MC 332 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 722: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 723: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 724: ...ns Limit switches External deceleration reference point cam Feedrate override Incremental feed mode Reference point approach 10 4 3 2 Program controlled traversing Only the main function should be tested to enable the use of programs as optimization aid The following data and signals can prevent program controlled traversing Read in inhibited DL 7 to DR 10 NC START 1 NC STOP 0 DR 2 NC START inhibi...

Page 725: ...h signal DB 32 DLK 1 bit 4 Indirectly related MD 5004 Bit 3 NC START without reference point MD 560 bit 4 no start inhibit for reference point The control provides options for two different types of reference point approach i e with and without automatic direction finding The relevant option is selected via MD 560 bit 6 Note From SW 5 simultaneous referencing of several axes in one channel is poss...

Page 726: ... is travelled from the reference point pulse to the actual reference point Because point is in different places for different speeds the distance still to be traversed must be determined before the actual reference point is approached The axis decelerates down to zero speed a a a a a a a a a a a a 3 Reference point reached a a a a a a a a a a 4 Note The NC s approach path from to after reaching th...

Page 727: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Speed MD 296 Path Reference point cam Reference point pulse Reference point 0 Limit switch If referencing is repeated several times...

Page 728: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a b c Trave...

Page 729: ... a a a a a a Traversing limit When the Direction key is pressed the PLC s Deceleration signal enables the NC to establish with absolute accuracy that the axis is already located at the reference point cam The axis therefore accelerates in the reverse direction MD 564 bit 0 to the speed defined in MD 284 refer to Section REFERENCE POINT APPROACH WITHOUT AUTOMATIC DIRECTION RECOGNITION for a detaile...

Page 730: ...Reference point direction negative Signal DB 32 DW K 2 bit 13 Referencing without programmed motion Signal DB 32 DW K 2 bit 12 Delay reference point approach General With SW 4 referencing without programmed travel movement without NC setpoint assignment referencing in follow up mode is possible This function is required for axes for example that cannot be operated in position controlled operation ...

Page 731: ...e to execute the function servo enable must also be set for an axis in follow up mode 10 4 4 5 Setting reference dimension by a PLC request SW 4 and higher The PLC request Set reference dimension permits to bring an axis to the Axis referenced state at any position without explicit referencing operation This function cannot be executed unless the axis is at standstill Corresponding data NC MD 1824...

Page 732: ...dition the axis specific RESET alarm 1028 Setting reference dimension not possible is triggered This monitoring function is not performed unless the axis is in position controlled operation when Set reference dimension is requested If position control is not active two different cases are possible a Follow up operation parking active Equal values for setpoint and actual value are set in this state...

Page 733: ...etween any two reference points is always different The absolute position of the axis in the machine system can thus be determined by crossing two reference marks and measuring the distance between those two marks The absolute position is sent to the NC the actual position has now been determined The direction and position from which the reference marks are crossed is of no significance A referenc...

Page 734: ...ng plug minimum 12 pin and the I V hybrid 20 way are both connected to start at pin 1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a X a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 735: ...s on the scale is calculated as follows Xmin Measured length on scale a a 2 k a Basic distance in multiples of the scale division b Scale division grid spacing in µm The maximum possible creep speed for the reference point approach is calculated as follows Vmax Xmin PCC Xmin Smallest possible reference mark distance PCC Set position controller cycle A value which is smaller than or equal to Vmax m...

Page 736: ...a a a a a a 2 n k a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a k a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a k a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a k a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 2 1 k a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 2 1 k a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 2 2 k a a a a a ...

Page 737: ...machine system absolute position in scale system xMA xLA Machine scale and linear scale in same direction MD 1808 bit 2 0 xLA xMA Scale system Machine system Absolute value offset a a a a a a a a a a a a 0 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 0 Direction of movement Machine and linear scale in opposite directions MD 1808 bit 2 1 xLA xMA Absolute value offset Direction of movement a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 738: ...alue By deriving the current axis position relative to the machine system i e the offset relative to the machine zero or another known accessible point in the machine system e g by measuring it with a laser interferometer By calculating the absolute offset from the measured positional value in the machine system and the value shown as the actual value in the scale system acc to the formula The cal...

Page 739: ...le C axis The individual spindle functions are produced with the following spindle modes Control mode Spindle rotates with constant speed or cutting rate open loop control of spindle speed Oscillation mode Spindle rotates at constant motor speed setpoint open loop control of spindle speed Positioning mode Spindle stops at a preset position oriented spindle stop C axis mode Spindle acts like a rota...

Page 740: ...he diagram Structure of spindle control provides an overview of the functions available and also the flow of data and commands Data flows in the direction indicated Setpoints and control data Actual values and status data Switching commands Status Structure of spindle control PROCESSOR Switching logic Mode switching Monitoring functions NC PLC Command channel Open loop speed control Servo position...

Page 741: ...hread cutting or the Revolutional feedrate function in which case an encoder must be mounted on the spindle If an encoder is fitted it is also used in the open loop control mode for monitoring and displaying the actual values of speed and position The encoder must be mounted directly on the spindle so that the actual speed and position of the spindle can be measured Selecting the open loop control...

Page 742: ...tio for the programmed speed exists no request for gear changing is generated The programmed speed is then transferred to the current gear ratio So it is important to ensure that there is always a suitable gear ratio available The behaviour of the spindle during gear ratio changing can be influenced by MD 521 bit 5 New S value after PLC acknowledgement If the bit is set the programmed speed setpoi...

Page 743: ... through the machine data MD 403 to 410 Max speed per gear ratio MD 411 to 418 Min speed per gear ratio If a gear stage is not used the value zero must be entered for the maximum speed of this gear stage and not the value in the standard machine data Regardless of which gear ratio is active the speed is limited by MD 451 Max chuck speed MD 448 Min motor speed SD 401 Programmable spindle speed limi...

Page 744: ...g sign This has to be implemented in the PLC user program by inverting IS SET ROTATION CW 10 5 3 Positioning mode M19 M19 through several revolutions 10 5 3 1 General In the positioning mode the spindle is driven to a preset position under position control and stopped there The position is reached either directly M19 or through several revolutions M19tsr Position control and actual value acquisiti...

Page 745: ...mental traversing path in user data of command channel spindle override remains active NC Request for M19 M19 in part program or during overstore set position as S value set position from setting data SD 402 if no S value has been programmed Acknowledging M19 If the signal Spindle position reached DB 31 DL k bit 4 is output during positioning by the NC the PLC must then output the signal Acknowled...

Page 746: ...d under position control The following data is needed Maximum permitted speed during positioning Maximum permitted acceleration Gain factor Position window This information is transferred to the user data on request from the command channel When there is a request from the NC or PLC the corresponding machine data of the active gear ratio is used which is MD 427 to 434 Creep speed for M19 as max sp...

Page 747: ... with encoder a Spindle stopped The spindle is driven to the preset position by the shortest path This means that the path to be traversed is always within the range 180 to 180 Determining the shortest path also determines the direction of rotation The maximum speed attained during positioning is the creep speed Speed characteristic for case 1a n t Creep speed for M19 Example for case 1a a a a a a...

Page 748: ...as possible If the actual speed is less than the creep speed the spindle is accelerated up to and no further than the creep speed If the actual speed is greater than the creep speed the spindle decelerated until the creep speed has been reached MD 427 Then the M19 position is approached with interpolation until the spindle can be stopped at the specified position utilizing maximum deceleration Spe...

Page 749: ...onism with zero mark In this case neither the actual position nor the distance to be traversed can be ascertained correctly Therefore the spindle is first driven at creep speed MD 427 to 434 until the zero mark of the encoder is recognized This allows the internal actual value counter to be synchronized with the encoder The remainder of the positioning sequence is identical to that of case 1b If w...

Page 750: ... spindle stopped spindle synchronized with encoder The specified angle in this case is not the position to be reached but the distance to be traversed The starting point for this distance is the last position to which the spindle was driven last M19 position The direction of rotation is determined by the sign of the programmed path If the spindle has not been driven to an absolute position before ...

Page 751: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 752: ...the beginning of the block M19 is cancelled and terminated by Emergency stop alarm 2000 Reset machine data dependent End of program M02 M30 machine data dependent Spindle disable DB 31 DW K 3 Servo loop error of spindle or axis Error that causes all axes to stop Cancellation of NCBB2 Acknowledge M19 PLC spindle control DB 31 DW K 2 in MDI AUTO jog or AUTOMATIC M19 can also be selected by overstori...

Page 753: ...l system and drive actuator Under some circumstances the control behaviour can be improved by increasing the voltage level relative to the set speed because it enables a higher resolution to be achieved and the analog interference noise can be reduced Consequently with some drive actuators such as the SIMODRIVE 650 a different scaling for the set speeds voltage levels can be selected by applying a...

Page 754: ... transfer the maximum speed setpoints Consequently when the positioning mode is started neither changeover of the drive actuator scaling nor changeover of the gain factor must be activated Changeover should only be effected when the spindle has come to rest Therefore it is sensible for it to be done when the interface signal SPINDLE STOPPED has been set by the NC system In all cases it is essentia...

Page 755: ...revent function M19 aborting on program end M30 M2 or RESET key In this case M19 can only be aborted by signal Acknowledge M19 from the PLC or by alarms Remove NCBB2 or EMERGENCY STOP Otherwise function M19 is only aborted on channel specific reset if the channel is aborted for which the spindle is entered in the channel DB as the spindle of that channel Setting IS SPINDLE DISABLE or resetting IS ...

Page 756: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a nk a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a nmax At speeds n above rated speed nn the drive acceleration capability decreases in relation to the speed Immediately above rated speed nn there is a range of constant power in which the torque and thus also the acceleration capability drop in proportion to 1 n When speed n increases further there is a range...

Page 757: ...aracteristics in the control in the form of an acceleration adaptation which is simple to parameterize Constant acceleration according to MD 478 as with previous SW up to a freely settable speed limit nx The speed limit nx is entered via a new MD 2471 MD 2478 which parameter set specific Above speed limit nx the acceleration rate is reduced according to the equation Acceleration MD 478 nx n n Pres...

Page 758: ...ot necessary to parameterize the characteristic for spindles which are not operated in synchronous groupings or which are equipped with feed drives As with previous software versions the acceleration characteristic is parameterized by the user according to technological requirements In this case analog and digital drives are treated in the same way Automatic adjustment using drive data e g breakdo...

Page 759: ...ed Spindle speed limitation Setting data G26 S DRK 2 bit 6 oscillation speed DRK 2 bit 4 position spindle DWK 3 spindle disable n set set spindle speed Actuator Gearing Spindle K Number of the spindle 1 to 6 S S MD 5200 bit 2 MD 5210 bit 7 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 760: ...witch off the control The operating system offers you a workpiece called STANDARD All data associated with the workpiece STANDARD are automatically loaded into the NCK memory when the control is powered up With SW 2 and higher you can use MD 5025 bit 7 to set whether the last active workpiece is to be loaded in the NCK at Power On With SW 3 and higher data e g IKA data can be loaded automatically ...

Page 761: ...es An archive list is a list of files directories workpieces files and other files and even archive lists that you can only read out via the V24 20mA interface When you read out an archive list the files listed are read out When you read an archive list in again the files are put back into their original directories and directories are put back into their original position in the directory tree It...

Page 762: ... a a a a a a DRAM not buffered a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Drive machine data a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a DRAM not...

Page 763: ... a a a a a a a a a a User mem a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Data mem a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a System data a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Oper sys a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Monitor a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 764: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 765: ...a SK NC SK Save start Place cursor on newly created workpiece Use Select key to choose data type Place cursor on NC data directory Use Select key to choose GIA Create a new workpiece in the local or global directory Services operating area SK Save start By using file name and SK OK data are being saved Note When implementing tool management the data blocks used must be saved by PG a a a a a a a a ...

Page 766: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Backup system No 2 1 continue No 2 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 767: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 768: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Select Services operating area device a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 769: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 7 SK Installation and startup a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 770: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 28 SK Loading start a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 771: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 36 SK Formatting NCK UM a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 772: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 45 Set Config area via toggle switch a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 46 SK Loading start a a a a a a a a...

Page 773: ... Area switchover a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 61 SK Diagnosis a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 774: ...ow diagram Loading from hard disk Section 11 1 7 Prerequisite The current PLC fixed program is installed on the hard disk When replacing PLC CPU items 8 to 10 16 to 29 as well as 32 36 and 37a to 63 do not apply Caution The contents of data blocks e g tool management are missing MMC CPU replacement Follow installation and startup instructions according to flow diagram Loading using the streamer Se...

Page 775: ...a a a a a a a a Steps 8 to 66 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a No a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a PLC CPU replacement a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 776: ...dependent errors must also be taken into account The checksum error can be determined by plotting an error curve over the entire traversing range of the axis The reference measuring system used must be a high precision instrument e g a laser interferometer The dimensional deviation at the workpiece can be significantly reduced by means of compensating values which are input to the control at the t...

Page 777: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 6000 4 comp points per MD 8 bits MD 6249 1000 500 1 Compensation point Measuring leadscrew error compensation The r...

Page 778: ... compensation is not possible at the reference point the error curve must be shifted so that the error is zero at the reference point Error 0 Traverse path Pos error Spacing Reference point Neg error Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 AA50 12 3 SINUMERIK 840C IA ...

Page 779: ...erance band l Spacing between 2 leadscrew error compensation points Setpoint position l S F F Maximum slope of error curve S The point with the greatest pitch error is determined and the travel l in which the specified amount S is passed through is established S Compensation amount MD 328 l Spacing MD 324 S l The relevant compensating values for the spacing is based on the permissible tolerance ba...

Page 780: ...ding with the reference point This compensation point is entered in encoded form in MD 316 The compensating value at this point must be 0 MD 316 0 198 249 6249 6198 1000 793 6000 1 Compensation point NC MD In view of the fact that the SINUMERIK 840C has a total of 1000 compensation points for all axes the control must be informed via MD 316 as to which of these 1000 points corresponds to the axis ...

Page 781: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 782: ...sation points e g 10 mm 235 mm traverse path max A 3 compensation values 10 mm grid spacing 205 mm traverse path max A 20 compensation values 10 mm grid spacing Total number of compensation values K A A Ref 3 20 1 24 compensation values The result is NC MD 3161 1 NC MD 6001 i e compensation point K5 is the point that corresponds to the reference point compensation at this point is not allowed Comp...

Page 783: ... travel must be negative at K6 positive at K16 and K17 negative at K20 and positive again at K24 The following machine data must be set Option leadscrew errror compensation NC MD 3161 1 to define K5 as reference point NC MD 3241 10000 10 mm spacing NC MD 3281 5 compensation value 5 µm for position control resolution of 1 2 x 10 3 mm NC MD 6000 00 11 00 00 positive compensation at K3 NC MD 6001 00 ...

Page 784: ...volved however significant differences may arise between the positive and negative directions of travel Consequently an error curve must also be plotted in the negative direction and input as compensation value The procedure is similar to that for entering the positive compensating values ensuring that the compensation ranges do not overlap between the positive and negative traversing movements an...

Page 785: ...0 2 revs 720 etc as are the functions However the axis is programmed as though it were a linear axis The units of the axis specific NC MD are treated differently Unit 10 3 degrees for position control resolution 1 2 x 10 3 units and input resolution 10 3 units Deactivation of automatic G68 NC MD 5052 Bit 0 G68 is generated by the NC automatically the first time rotary axes with modulo calculation ...

Page 786: ...nations Rotary axis Modulo prog Modulo 360 Comments 564 Bit5 572 Bit 2 560 Bit 7 MD 0 0 0 Linear axis 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 Use permitted 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 Use illegal Axis specific machine data If an axis is defined as rotary axis NC MD 564 bit 5 the following applies in dependence on NC MD input resolution and position control resolution a 1 unit 2 units of position control resolution referenc...

Page 787: ...onds to that of a simultaneous axis The ERA is not restricted by block limits in other words it continues to rotate in the desired direction at the desired speed provided no stop criterion is fulfilled shutdown axis reset error Furthermore shutdown can be effected with a specified position The characteristics of the Endlessly rotating axis are as follows Axis is generally in position control mode ...

Page 788: ...et mode group changeover and M02 M30 either Endlessly rotating operation can be interrupted with the new axis specific signal Axis reset in DB 32 The Endlessly rotating axis function operates on a multi channel basis i e requests may come from several channels which means that it is not possible to automatically derive a stop or reset command for the appropriate rotary axis from an NC STOP or RESE...

Page 789: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Infeed to end dimension a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 790: ...G24 with axes spindles The different dwell types cause different deadtimes For this reason there are new machine data for deadtime compensation see above For description see Section 12 4 1 above Note During dwell in absolute positions G90 the speed of the axis spindle must not be larger than Dmax so that overtravel beyond the dwell position is reliably detected If the speed is greater lower than D...

Page 791: ... Z are allocated to each control panel The machine data can also be modified with functions by invoking a PLC cycle in a free channel A warm restart is required to modify the machine data listed in 12 3 1 When working area I is in use the three main axes X Y and Z axis B and the spindle are allocated to machine control panel 1 and mode group 1 Axes B1 can be traversed in JOG mode in working area I...

Page 792: ...interface and the EMERGENCY STOP signal on the NC PLC and PLC NC interfaces are not processed control is in RESET state Functional sequence of a warm restart 1 NC Data are written to NC MD 360 with the aid of CL 800 commands can also be implemented via PLC Auxiliary function for warm restart request is output e g H1234 2 PLC Auxiliary function is interpreted The PLC writes to NC MD 360 also possib...

Page 793: ...sformation parameter 7 NC MD 737 1st transformation parameter 8 NC MD 738 1st transformation parameter 9 NC MD 739 1st transformation parameter 10 NC MD 740 to 809 2nd to 8th transformation parameter 1 to 10 NC MD 5060 Channel numbers of the transformation NC MD 5061 G function for transformation selection NC MD 5062 Axis name 1st fictitious axis NC MD 5063 Axis name 2nd fictitious axis NC MD 5064...

Page 794: ...ordinate transformation for applications of the coordination transformation TRANSMIT 2D coordinate transformation see Section Coordinate transformation 3D coordinate transformation see Section Coordinate transformation and in the Programming Guide to System 840C Note When TRANSMIT is implemented the programmed path velocity is reduced to a level where the maximum speed of rotation of the rotary ax...

Page 795: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 796: ...ation through Rotation through X The angle or real machine axis through which the associated axis rotates is always assigned to the 1st real axis MD 5065 The angle or real machine axis through which the associated axis rotates is always assigned to the 2nd real axis MD 5066 The angle or real machine axis through which the associated axis rotates is always assigned to the 3rd real axis MD 5067 Siem...

Page 797: ...nt extended address is permitted Example 0000 0010 Z 0001 1001 Q1 Bit No extended address address number key blank 0000 1 0001 2 0010 3 0011 4 0100 5 0101 6 0110 7 0111 8 1000 9 1001 10 1010 11 1011 12 1100 13 1101 14 1110 15 1111 address name key X 0000 Y 0001 Z 0010 A 0011 B 0100 C 0101 U 0110 V 0111 W 1000 Q 1001 E 1010 7 4 5 6 3 2 1 0 Legal names for axes angles chamfer and radius A unassigned...

Page 798: ...rmation parameters 1 to 10 770 779 Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 0 99 999 999 99 999 999 units IS Active on Warm restart 6th transformation parameters 1 to 10 780 789 Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 0 99 999 999 99 999 999 units IS Active on Warm restart 7th transformation parameters 1 to 10 790 799 Default value Lower input value Upper input value...

Page 799: ...Xreal a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a X a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Y a a a a a a a a a a a a a2 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a1 Transformation parameters for 3D coordinate transformation Parameter 1 X shift of the real system in direction X relative to the fictitious system unit units IS Parameter 2 Y shift of the real system in direction Y relative to the fictitious system unit un...

Page 800: ... fictitious system rotates through the real machine coordinate system In this case the rotation begins with the 3rd real axis X The angle through which the fictitious coordinate system is rotated must be negated by a right handed coordinating system see angle definition pictured above The angles through which the fictitious coordinate system is rotated are in the case of a Gimbal head millhead equ...

Page 801: ...leration The acceleration value must be calculated in such a way that the real axes of transformation are not overloaded minimum acceleration value of A1R to A5R MD 280 Maximum speed MD 288 JOG speed MD 292 Rapid JOG The speeds can be freely selected as they are monitored by the control MD 304 IPO parameter MD 360 Operating mode group of the axis MD 564 Bit 6 Fictitious axes The axis is declared a...

Page 802: ... automatically If Feed hold is applied to a real axis in the transformation grouping this applies to the entire grouping When Delete distance to go occurs the fictitious distances to go are cleared The signal Transformation active is set in the channel specific interface NC PLC for every channel in which the transformation is active see also Interface Description Warm restart is possible when tran...

Page 803: ...nsformation due to 714 Only one transformation can be selected at a time in any one channel Transformations which are running parallel in different channels must not refer to the same axes Alarm 2190 The plane definition given in the channel specific machine data applies for the real system When a transformation is selected a plane is set for the fictitious system The fictitious plane is defined i...

Page 804: ... axes are ignored in transformation Fictitious axes cannot be traversed with the handwheel Real axes can only be traversed with the handwheel when transformation is not active DRF is not possible with fictitious axes DRF is possible with real axes only when a program block is active not for NC STOP The settable angle of rotation for coordinate system rotation G54 to G57 must always be ZERO The pro...

Page 805: ...unction for transformation selection G131 0001 0001 G231 0010 0001 G331 0011 0001 NC MD 5062 Axis name 1st fictitious axis A1F NC MD 5063 Axis name 2nd fictitious axis A2F A1F X1 A2F Y1 NC MD 5064 Axis name of the infeed axis real axis Example 0000 0010 Z NC MD 5065 Axis name of the 1st real axis A1R linear axis NC MD 5066 Axis name of the 2nd real axis A2R rotary axis Infeed axis Z c c x A2R A1R ...

Page 806: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 807: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 808: ...l required data to be available at the next transformation selection all internal data required for the transformation are instantly recalculated after each MD change MD 730 809 This is executed parallel to machining thus avoiding loss of machining time Functionality is effective on the following transformation types 2D coordinate rotation and 3D coordinate rotation Functionality is effective in t...

Page 809: ...axis mode Spindle acts like a rotary axis position controlled spindle Following error compensation for thread cutting Multiple thread Thread recutting The principle improvements are Spindle speeds up to 99 999 rev min without actual value encoder Spindle speeds up to 30 000 rev min with actual value encoder Encoder specific resolution Monitoring of encoder cutoff frequency Adjustable zero mark Imp...

Page 810: ...the direction indicated Setpoints and control data Actual values and status data Switching commands Status Structure of spindle control CONTROL UNIT Switching logic Mode switching Monitoring functions NC PLC Command channel Open loop speed control Servo position control Monitoring functions Link RAM Measuring circuits Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 AA50 12 35 SINUMERIK 840C IA ...

Page 811: ...hread cutting or the Revolutional feedrate function in which case an encoder must be mounted on the spindle If an encoder is fitted it is also used in the open loop control mode for monitoring and displaying the actual values of speed and position The encoder must be mounted directly on the spindle so that the actual speed and position of the spindle can be measured Selecting the open loop control...

Page 812: ...en the PLC has acknowledged gear ratio changing This prevents an unwanted increase in speed while still in the old ratio before changeover Data required This section describes the data that is of particular significance to the open loop control mode Limiting the speed Parameters for maximum and minimum speed limits can be assigned for each gear ratio Parameter assignment is effected through the ma...

Page 813: ...ting sign This has to be implemented in the PLC user program by inverting IS SET ROTATION CW 12 7 2 3 Positioning mode M19 M19 through several revolutions General In the positioning mode the spindle is driven to a preset position under position control and stopped there The position is reached either directly M19 or through several revolutions M19tsr Position control and actual value acquisition A...

Page 814: ...is given in response to a request from the NC or PLC The position is specified by S value machine data or setting data The values must be within the range 0 to 359 99 and the entry must be to an accuracy of 0 01 Distance traversed An incremental path is given in response to a request from the command channel This path is specified in the user data of the command channel and can be more than one re...

Page 815: ...rent from the conventional spindle control To begin with it is necessary to distinguish between absolute positioning M19 from NC or PLC and incremental positioning M19tsr from command channel Absolute positioning M19 The spindle is to be brought to a preset angular position as quickly as possible and stopped there Driving to a particular position is only possible if the spindle is synchronized wit...

Page 816: ...position and the deceleration distance based on the momentary speed The spindle is driven to the specified position in the direction of travel The sum of this required distance and the deceleration distance then gives the distance to be traversed which is covered as quickly as possible If the actual speed is less than the creep speed the spindle is accelerated up to and no further than the creep s...

Page 817: ...n t Creep speed for M19 Speed at beginning of positioning Beginning of positioning Speed characteristic for case 1b actual speed creep speed n t Creep speed for M19 Speed at beginning of positioning Beginning of positioning Dwell from MD 419 Dwell from MD 478 12 42 Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 AA50 SINUMERIK 840C IA ...

Page 818: ... 495 2 Spindle not in synchronism with zero mark In this case neither the actual position nor the distance to be traversed can be ascertained correctly Therefore the spindle is first driven at creep speed MD 427 to 434 until the zero mark of the encoder is recognized This allows the internal actual value counter to be synchronized with the encoder The remainder of the positioning sequence is ident...

Page 819: ...arted if M19 is still selected Incremental positioning There are two preconditions to be fulfilled in this case spindle stopped spindle synchronized with encoder The specified angle in this case is not the position to be reached but the distance to be traversed The starting point for this distance is the last position to which the spindle was driven last M19 position The direction of rotation is d...

Page 820: ... a a a a a a a a a Last M19 position 0 Actual position 270 Specified travel 180 This means that the spindle has moved 90 from the last M19 position in the opposite direction to the specified direction so the total is Distance to be traversed 270 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserve...

Page 821: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 822: ...ted by applying a configurable terminal signal This changing of the scaling in the drive actuator must be allowed for in the control so that overall the effective gain factor remains the same The gain factor dependent on gear ratio MD 435 to 442 must be adapted to the new scaling The factor for gain changing is entered as machine data The value is calculated from MD 469 where N scaling factor in t...

Page 823: ...the maximum speed setpoints Consequently when the positioning mode is started neither changeover of the drive actuator scaling nor changeover of the gain factor must be activated Changeover should only be effected when the spindle has come to rest Therefore it is sensible for it to be done when the interface signal SPINDLE STOPPED has been set by the NC system In all cases it is essential for the ...

Page 824: ...ction motor a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a TorqueM a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Constant torque a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 825: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a The obtainable linear ramp up time constants increase out of proportion for higher speeds a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a T2 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Time a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a nn a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a nk a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 826: ...ange of constant power This can be achieved approximately by means of an additionally applied adaptation factor c MD 2479 MD 2486 Acceleration MD 478 for n nx Acceleration MD 478 nx n c c 1 c for n nx Fig 3 Possible shapes of acceleration characteristic when adaptation factor is varied For c 1 1 100 the acceleration above speed limit nx is reduced in inverse proportion to the speed a a a a a a a a...

Page 827: ... to parameterize the characteristic for spindles which are not operated in synchronous groupings or which are equipped with feed drives As with previous software versions the acceleration characteristic is parameterized by the user according to technological requirements In this case analog and digital drives are treated in the same way Automatic adjustment using drive data e g breakdown limit doe...

Page 828: ...een evaluated For C axes with one measuring system the 1st measuring system must be the same as that of the spindle Assignment and parameterizing Each spindle can be assigned just one C axis by means of the machine data MD 461 Like all axes this must be parameterized via the axial machine data When switching from the spindle to the C axis the spindle zero speed tolerance in MD 446 is decisive Befo...

Page 829: ...ions These is no reaction to these functions being skipped even if one of them is programmed in the target block If necessary the user must execute an overstore operation to make sure that the C axis is in the correct operating mode C axis synchronization SW 4 and higher Corresponding data NC MD 521 bit 2 Ramp up as C axis Since only one absolute system exists for the spindle and associated C axis...

Page 830: ...reference point approach is still possible with the C axis e g with G74 The sequence is the same as for normal feed axes Taking the zero mark offset into account provides the facility described below for optimizing reference point approach for a C axis Please observe If a double track encoder is used for spindle and C axis operation the zero marks of both encoder systems may be offset to each othe...

Page 831: ...ion Where this is not required it can be ignored by using the signals Resynchronize spindle or Parking axis If the reference point remains valid the zero mark found during C axis operation is also valid in spindle operation and vice versa In this way the unnecessary movements resulting with every spindle axis switchover for resynchronization referencing can be avoided as far as possible on conditi...

Page 832: ... is requested by the NC or PLC before the signal SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZED has been set again then the spindle traverses the zero mark again before it approaches the programmed position If the signal SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZED is cancelled in C axis mode then the axis must be referenced explicitly again e g with G74 immediately afterwards Setting the signals in the C axis mode produces the following results ...

Page 833: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 834: ...s an essential precondition for the selection of the C axis mode So if the PARKING AXIS signal is cancelled in the C axis mode the C axis must be explicitly referenced e g with G74 If the signal is cancelled in the spindle mode the C axis can be referenced automatically when the spindle is synchronized The following can be employed 1 Program an M function for selecting the C axis mode 2 Decode an ...

Page 835: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 836: ...ulse multiplication for HMS MD 460 Spindle assignment setpoint output MD 462 Cutoff frequency of spindle encoder MD 520 Configuration bits MD 521 Configuration bits Machine data for configuring the C axis interface MD 200 Axis assignment actual value input and servo CPU MD 308 Cutoff frequency of C axis encoder MD 364 Pulses variable incremental weighting MD 368 Distance traversed variable increme...

Page 837: ... or one double track encoder Actual value C axis Actual value spindle Setpoint C axis Setpoint spindle a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a M Spindle Gear ratios Drive actuator Configuration with two encoders and two drives Setpoint spindle Setpoint C axis Actual value C axis Actual value spindle Spindle Gear ratios Gear ratios a a a a a a a a a a a a M a a a a a a a a a a a a M Drive actuator Drive ac...

Page 838: ...tly set for each actual value input MD 520 bit 1 and MD 564 bit 2 must be set correctly The set signs take effect in one or the other of the operating modes Spindle operation MD 520 bit1 active C axis operation MD 564 bit2 active c Spindle and C axis have different setpoint outputs The sign must be correctly set for each setpoint input MD 521 bit 1 and MD 564 bit 1 must be correctly set The set si...

Page 839: ...8 The speed should be constant within one turn Depending on the speed increase decrease deviations can occur with tapered threads with constant speed G96 12 8 1 Multiple thread A multiple thread can be cut using a starting angle with this function Here the channel specific starting angle of the leading spindle is programmed directly via G92A for the individual thread turn Example The part program ...

Page 840: ...MD is set otherwise the message Option not available appears Over store INC variable Recut thread The precut thread is loaded in the spindle Now use the direction keys to move the tool above one of the thread bases Then press the softkey Store position As a result the Offset angle and the Starting angle G92A are automatically set to zero This completes setting up Now you can start the part program...

Page 841: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 842: ...he following G group Internal G group division with 36b Internal G group 0 G functions 00 01 10 11 02 03 33 34 35 06 12 13 36 MD MD M T MD MD MD MD MD MD MD MD MD MD MD G group division for all other cases not for 36b Internal G group 1 G functions 00 01 10 11 02 03 33 34 35 06 12 13 36 MD MD M T MD MD MD MD MD MD MD MD MD MD MD T M Initial setting turning and milling MD Initial setting can be set...

Page 843: ...ia MD When the Thread cutting position controlled spindle function is selected G98 is automatically triggered when G36 is called G98 can also be programmed on its own in a block in the same way as G94 G95 G96 G97 If G98 is programmed together with several rotary axes or with linear axes only alarm 3006 Wrong block structure is triggered 12 9 2 2 Switching off the functions The function G36 is deac...

Page 844: ...304 Thread lead 0 or a programmed address where axis and thread lead do not harmonize triggers alarm 3006 Wrong block structure At least 2 axes of which one is a rotary axis must be programmed otherwise alarm 3006 Wrong block structure is triggered G98 is triggered internally with G36 i e the programmed feedrate F refers only to the rotary axis in rev min The resulting path feedrate C axis and lin...

Page 845: ...64 12 9 3 Parameter set switchover with thread functions As the function Rigid tapping can be greatly influenced by mechanical and design aspects of the machine a second set of parameters servo gain factor feedforward control factor time constant for dynamic feed forward control can be stored in MD 1320 MD 1260 and MD 1324 for adapting the function to the machine Function G36 is used to switch ove...

Page 846: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 847: ...ollowing program section from the FIFO memory can be executed with short block change times By programming G171 the following occurs in this order Processing stopped FIFO memory filled up Execution continued Execution is stopped until the FIFO memory is full up to a block with M02 30 up to 714 or up to a block which generates a 714 setting data block It only makes sense to program G171 in AUTOMATI...

Page 848: ...cks The number of predecoded blocks can be limited with the channel specific setting data SD 204 When the program is run in a small value should be set here 2 to 10 The real number of predecoded blocks is displayed in NC SD 206 See the description of the setting data The two setting data are displayed in the program control display Control by the user of predecoding example The main application of...

Page 849: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 850: ...s and falls with the machine absolute value Opposite direction The absolute encoder value rises as the machine absolute value falls and vice versa Direct measuring system The absolute encoder is a position measuring system e g linear scale and is connected directly to the mechanical section Indirect measuring system The absolute encoder is used to measure position and speed and is therefore connec...

Page 851: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 852: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 853: ... error is displayed in the Service number line in the Service status display menu The error number is displayed Error numbers are explained in the section Absolute encoder errors Note When the absolute encoder is first switched on various absolute encoder numbers are displayed for a period of approx 10 minutes This is caused by the back up battery of the absolute encoder which only establishes err...

Page 854: ... without reference point approach Once the SIPOS absolute encoder has been synchronized it is very easy to determine the direction of the SIPOS absolute encoder This is done by traversing the axis concerned to any desired position and starting up the control If after setting up positive approach and POWER ON a larger absolute encoder value is displayed the system is in the same direction and does ...

Page 855: ...ubmodule faulty Check whether absolute encoder and absolute submodule are damaged Check that connectors are firmly in position Error No 51 70 Meaning Remedy Absolute submodule and or connection between absolute submodule and measuring circuit faulty Check whether absolute submodule is damaged Check that connector between measuring circuit and absolute submodule is firmly in position Error No 71 80...

Page 856: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 857: ... measuring system resolution with which the NC position control is working results from the interaction between incremental encoder and interpolating evaluation electronics HW SW Incremental measuring step grid spacing product of all pulse multiplications NC MD 1264 grid spacing EnDat measuring step The NC requires this MD to convert the EnDat measuring steps into incremental measuring steps Only ...

Page 858: ...ution 2048 4 EnDat measuring step 1 22 µm 2048 4 10 mm NC MD 1264 4 Linear grid spacing Lin EnDat measuring step 2048 10 mm 2048 4 10 mm Example LC 181 Grid spacing finest track 16 µm EnDat measuring step 0 1 µm Internal pulse multiplication 4 External pulse multiplication interpolation 512 Position controller resolution 0 5 µm 0 5 10 3 mm Lin incremental measuring step 0 0078125 µm Lin grid spaci...

Page 859: ...utilized In as from SW 6 the functionality Range extension with ENDAT absolute encoder see Section 12 11 3 can also be used for larger traversing ranges Restrictions with rotary axes The following restriction applies for rotary axes with absolute encoders in endless operation up to SW 5 If the encoder is fitted to the motor the gear ratio to the load must be n 1 n motor revolutions on 1 load revol...

Page 860: ...d between 180 degrees and 180 degrees if MD 1808 bit 6 1 or between 8 to 8 rota tions if MD 1808 bit 6 0 Examples for incorrect overflow MD 1808 bit 6 MD 1804 bit 0 Position before POWER OFF Position after POWER OFF 1 0 45 degrees 315 degrees 1 1 45 degrees 45 degrees 1 0 315 degrees 315 degrees 1 1 315 degrees 45 degrees 1 1 2700 degrees 7 5 rev 180 degrees 0 1 2700 degrees 7 5 rev 2700 degrees 0...

Page 861: ...erence point approach with EnDat absolute encoders is possible only after resetting of the NC MD 1808 bit 3 The counting methods in the same direction and in the opposite direction are determined as follows Move the axis to any position start the control and note down the absolute value If a larger absolute value is displayed after a positive traversing step and another POWER ON the system is in t...

Page 862: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 863: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 864: ...9 must be calculated This is done by continuous division of the maximum traversing range of the encoder by 2 Absolute offset absmax absolute offset 2 absmax 99999999 absolute offset absmax use NC MD 1808 bit 1 99999999 absolute offset absolute offset absmax absolute offset 2 absmax Example Assumptions Position controller resolution 0 5 10 4 mm Spindle pitch 10 mm EQN 1325 4096 revolutions Maximum ...

Page 865: ...rrors are displayed axis specifically in the control with the error message Absolute encoder defective The precise type of error can be found in the line Service number in the menu service status display The error number is displayed If the error numbers are converted to 8 bit binary numbers calculator accessory the single error sources are defined as follows Bit 0 Not defined Bit 1 Not defined Bi...

Page 866: ...oder is used However axis measurement is not necessary if an NC MD file was stored immediately before data loss in the SRAM Possible applications are SW update Replacement of the NC CPU Replacement of the CSB board Motion limitations when the axis is switched off When switched off the axis must only turned through half the definite traversing range of the absolute encoder e g coasting after a powe...

Page 867: ...also avoid an error when determining the actual position of endlessly rotating rotary axes endless traversing range within one or 16 revolutions the denominator of the gear encoder load must be entered as NC MD 3940 during start up of the machine Example Gearing 33 59 59 encoder revolutions produce 33 load revolutions MD 3940 59 If the numerator and denominator of the gear have a common divisor th...

Page 868: ...ted The absolute offset is set correctly in MD 396 after the axis has been measured and declared valid by setting MD 1808 bit 3 1 Step 3 With linear axes especially it is advisable to approach a known position e g a visible mark and then back up the NC MD at this point This MD file can then be used at this position after data loss in the SRAM instead of a file saved shortly before Note After each ...

Page 869: ...m informs you that start up is not yet complete and remains active even after a Power Off The alarm cannot be acknowledged until normal mode is restored after Step 5 Step 4 Set NC MD 1808 bit 7 to 0 Step 5 Terminate initial clear mode Step 6 The drives equipped with an absolute encoder must now enter the closed loop control control e g via a small traversing movement However the limitations for mo...

Page 870: ...feed DWx 6 G68 G94 95 G90 91 The function Path dimension from the PLC is activated via MD 5018 bit 5 In addition the number of user interfaces ASS must be entered in PLC MD 33 and the function activated with PLC machine data bit 6026 1 The path dimension is executed directly when the command channel strobe DB41 DR0 is detected by the NC Depending on the path condition in the command channel G90 G9...

Page 871: ...program is running see negative acknowledgement Negative acknowledgement error condition If an error occurs during path dimension processing then the function is acknowledged through specification of an error number DB 41 DWm 1 12 12 3 Interruption The path dimension function is interrupted when the following conditions are fulfilled Reset by key RESET by a PLC user program Change in operating mod...

Page 872: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 873: ...sferred from the PLC then the control behaves in the same way as in AUTOMATIC mode the setpoint actual value difference is displayed While the path dimension is being traversed the interface signal Program in progress remains active if the status displays are configured then the appropriate icon is displayed The following effects occur as a result of program influences and the corresponding machin...

Page 874: ...n the block before the path dimension are corrected i e the end point of the block is approached again The other axes are only corrected when they are traversed again in the part program Path dimension from the PLC A y x N10 1 N20 2 3 4 N30 5 As you can see in the above diagram the axis positions are corrected to the end point of block N20 point A after the path dimension has been traversed and NC...

Page 875: ...n On an NC start after a block search with calculation after a rotary axis path dimension the calculated distance to go is projected within a range of 180 distance to go 180 On NC start after automatic interrupt the complete distance to the part program block end point is traversed Indexing axis If an axis is an indexing axis the path dimension is not interpreted as a division number The path dime...

Page 876: ...ous axis as a path dimension axis The path dimension axis is transformed into a real axis and traversed 2 Real axis as a path dimension axis The real axis is not traversed The path dimension function is aborted and a negative acknowledgement is sent to the PLC If the transformation is not selected and not active and the path dimension axis is a fictitious axis the path dimension function is aborte...

Page 877: ...s positioning auxiliary axes turrets tool magazines as well as for machining teeth gear machining tool grinding The initial setting of this function and the parameters are set in the machine data Positioning in the indexing grid is carried out with traversing keys and in JOG or INC mode It is also possible to traverse an NC axis to the desired indexing position from the PLC via the command channel...

Page 878: ...ia the command channel The user must specify axis number division number velocity preparatory functions etc Division from the PLC can be executed in NC modes AUT MDA JOG INC and REPOS The indexing position can be approached incrementally and absolutely These are defined in the preparatory functions in the command channel G90 G91 Please refer to the function Path dimension from PLC with regard to t...

Page 879: ...n The actual indexing position is the location of the magazine location that has been approached Division number The division number states for incremental division G91 the number of divisions by which the axis must be positioned Where absolute division is programmed G90 the division number is the setpoint indexing position to which the axis is to be positioned Division reference dimension The div...

Page 880: ... a a a a DRD a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a µm a a a a a a a a a a 7 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 4 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 5 a 1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 1 000 000 µm 6 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ND a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 881: ...in the specified direction of rotation G91 The indexing axis moves from the current indexing position by the number of division specified by the division number The division number can be larger than the number of divisions Absolute division in the specified direction of rotation G90 Rotary axis The indexing axis is positioned to the defined division number within 360 degrees The division number m...

Page 882: ...tion No inputs necessary When using the functions with chain magazines a rotary axis may need several revolutions to match one magazine revolution The division reference remains in this case however 360 degrees The rotary axis or chain magazines can be matched with the variable incremental weighting NC MD 1112 Name Division offset Significance Relation between actual value 0 and indexing position ...

Page 883: ... Active Every 100 ms Notes regarding effects of machine data If the function is used workpiece related the machine data are altered during workpiece machining and in setup mode This is possible by altering the MD from the PLC altering the MD during configuring user memory submodule UMS altering the MD via CL 800 If the machine data are altered during configuring this can be carried out without usi...

Page 884: ... a a a a a 140 000 µm a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a µm a a a a a a a a a a a a 4 a a a a a a a a a a a a 5 1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 200 000 µm 6 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 885: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 886: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a The places after the decimal point are used to check travel and to display a non division po...

Page 887: ...exing axis across geometry resolutions in the same way as the normal axes i e no divisions Zero offsets tool offsets Zero offsets and tool offsets have no effect on an indexing axis Coupled motion Prerequisite Coupled motion is selected and active 1 Main axis as indexing axis The coupled motion axes are traversed with the main axis 2 Coupled motion axis as indexing axis The coupled motion axes are...

Page 888: ...int path can be activated MD 1272 with option bit MD 1820 bit 0 MD 486 to level out dynamic differences between interpolating axes See figure for structure of feedforward control Please note the additional calculation time required for this function a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a d dt a a a a a a a a a a a a d dt D feedforward control factor MD 1124 MD 2449 MD 312 or MD 465 Feedforward contro...

Page 889: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 890: ... a a a a a a a a a P gain MD 252 or 435 ff MD 1320 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Filter Low pass Band stop MD 1500 1519 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 891: ...nt approach is always executed with the currently selected measuring system The first measuring system always serves as the reference system in the control it determines the resolution of the position control Only the actual values of the selected measuring system are used for the position control It is possible to switch to the second measuring system via the axis specific PLC control signal DB 3...

Page 892: ...axis for C axis operation the second measuring system is used for the spindle operating modes and must be parameterized with MD 400 C axis spindle are assigned in MD 461 Control bit Measuring system 1 2 in DB32 can also be used for C axes however the switchover tolerance MD 1216 has no effect If the control signal is kept to 1 the mode controlled measuring circuit switchover spindle C axis measuri...

Page 893: ... can be compensated for by applying an additional speed setpoint pulse with a high enough amplitude and correct sign Other measurements have shown that the compensating amplitude of the friction feedforward value does not remain constant across the whole acceleration range Where the acceleration is higher feedforward control must be applied with a smaller compensation value than for smaller accele...

Page 894: ...ensation dependancy on the acceleration must also be considered This is done by measuring this dependancy at various points in the range between acceleration 0 and set maximum acceleration The characteristic obtained from these measurement results must then parameterized axis specifically in machine data 1232 1236 1240 1248 and 1252 See Section 5 MDD Section File functions for a description of how...

Page 895: ...ypical quadrant transition points without QEC Figure 2 Radius deviations at the quadrant transition points without compensation a a a a a a a a II a a a a a a a a a a a a IV a a a a a a a a I a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Counter 1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 896: ...t crossover points see Figure 4 Figure 4 Compensating amplitude too high a a a a a a a a a a a a II a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a IV a a a a a a a a I a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Counter 1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Counter 2 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 897: ...less that the programmed radius see Figure 6 Figure 6 Compensation time constant too large a a a a a a a a II a a a a a a a a a a a a IV a a a a a a a a I a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Counter 1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a C...

Page 898: ...a a a a a a a a a 1 a a a a a a a a a a a a 2 a a a a a a a a a a a a 3 a a a a a a a a a a a a 4 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a2 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a3 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 3 A distinction is made between four ranges in the characteristics a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a nmax a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 899: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 900: ...un the same part program on machines with different axis names as well as on the same machine tool but with different channels 12 17 2 Axis converter 12 17 2 1 Description of function If the converter is active it converts the axis address and address extension in neutral part programs into a different axis address and address extension Up to 8 axes per NC channel can be converted at the same time...

Page 901: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 902: ...y LF N20 714 LF N30 S1 500 M1 03 LF The auxiliary function here Mxy in the block tells the PLC that the read in disable must be placed here The function 714 stops block processing and empties the NC channel buffer Now the PLC can read the spindle conversion data via FB62 into the setting data of the NC After this read in disable must be cancelled The block is converted to S2 500 M2 03 if S1 S2 is ...

Page 903: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 904: ...el to the basic interpolations linear circular spline interpolation The following are typical GI function applications Gear tooth machining on hobbers gear shapers or grinders Complete rear face or polygonal turning machining operations on lathes Gantry machines axes Flying tool changes with magazine in motion on the fly synchronization The gearbox interpolation function can be activated in all op...

Page 905: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Actual value LD 3 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Actual value LD 4 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 906: ...he NC multiplies these leading drive values with the appropriate transmission ratio link factor and applies them to the following drive as a total Apart from these leading drives the compensatory controller and overlaid following drive motions can also supply an additional setpoint for the following drive FDSet LD1 KF1 LD2 KF2 LD3 KF3 LD4 KF4 LD5 KF5 FDover FDSet Part setpoint following drive LD1 ...

Page 907: ...he same dynamic response identical rise time servo gain factor setpoint filter etc For this reason the setpoint link should be used only for leading and following drives of the same type leading axis following axis or leading spindle following spindle since the dynamic performance of the drives is comparable only in such cases Leading following drives in a setpoint link with compensatory controlle...

Page 908: ...alternative link type K4 with software version 4 for ELG synchronous spindle applications This is an actual position link corresponding to the existing link type K2 however its feedforward control path is supplied by the setpoints of the leading axes spindles instead of by the less steady actual values for link type K2 To ensure that the dynamic response of the leading and following axis axes is e...

Page 909: ...ould be activated to compensate drift errors It is still useful to implement dynamic response matching by means of the setpoint filters which reduces the time required to optimize the controllers involved in the link during start up Compensatory control In addition to the setpoint actual value link a compensatory controller can be connected into the system This controller checks the present actual...

Page 910: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 911: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 912: ...ing address K3 Setpoint position link simulated leading address Setpoint position of leading address Setpoint position input of following address K4 Actual position and setpoint velocity link Actual position of leading address Setpoint position input of following address GI link branch with IKA input A supplied by IKA input B supplied by K11 Setpoint link Setpoint position of leading address Speci...

Page 913: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 914: ...rogrammed in each case ELG With a following axis override only 75 of the acceleration value are used for the following axis The remaining 25 are reserved for possible actual value linkage 3 On the fly synchronization For some applications e g hobbing synchronous spindles the leading and following drives must not only operate in synchronism but also at a specific angle in relation to one another Th...

Page 915: ...sitions Leading drives which are not to be synchronized must be at standstill or decoupled Synchronization will not otherwise be successful It will likewise not be possible to synchronize the drives if the following drive is traversed simultaneously with overlay by the user or from the program Depending on the setting of NC MD 1848 526 bit 5 Block change after synchronization reached block changes...

Page 916: ...es not then become effective until the target block is reached If a block search is carried out when the link is active the following drive positions in the target block remain undefined since no axis movements take place If reference is made to defined positions of the following drive on completion of the block search then a G403 on the fly synchronization must be executed after the target block ...

Page 917: ...et too high as this causes de synchronization between the leading and following drives The following diagram shows the velocity monitoring functions which are available for the following axis The monitoring characteristics for following spindles are identical Diagram showing velocity monitoring functions for following axis a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 918: ...n is limited when the maximum velocity is reached the position reference of the link would be lost To make sure that the following axis does not exceed the maximum velocity the user has to take appropriate measures as for example a prior test of the part program For reasons of user support the so called warning threshold for nmax and amax MD 1448 configurable via machine data has been provided for...

Page 919: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 7 8 MD1448 Hysteresis threshold a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 920: ...pindles for velocity acceleration limitation Dependent on the actual machining situation it may be necessary to enable only certain axes and spindles of the mode group for velocity acceleration limitation The following G functions of the part program are used for enabling or disabling the velocity acceleration limiting function of the axes and spindles G405 Meaning Velocity acceleration limitation...

Page 921: ...terface signal is set to 0 These interface signals make it possible to control the process sequence as a function of the synchronized state of the following drive from the PLC user program For example it is possible to delay enabling of the hobber feed until the NS SYNCHRONISM signal is present Synchronism monitoring in LINK ON state nFD VFD t a a a a a a a a a a a a 1 a a a a a a a a a a a a 0 a ...

Page 922: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 923: ...finition of link structure and link type The GI grouping consisting of a maximum of 5 leading drives and one following drive is defined by the configuration The configuration also includes specification of the link type which determines how each individual leading drive in the grouping is to act on the following drive The required signal paths are set up internally but not activated The link facto...

Page 924: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 925: ...eal or simulated drives rotary or linear axes or spindles The following axis can be a real rotary axis or a real linear axis Up to 4 leading axes 1 leading spindle may act on a following spindle within a GI grouping The leading axes can be real or simulated rotary or linear axes In the case of a following spindle exactly one leading spindle may and must be defined within the grouping However anoth...

Page 926: ...G400 G402 and G403 have been programmed block changes can be delayed or stopped on the basis of the following three signals INTERLOCK LINK ON INTERLOCK LINK OFF SYNCHRONISM FINE in conjunction with NC MD 1848 526 bit 2 SYNCHRONIZATION REACHED with NC MD 1848 526 bit 5 When LINK ON G402 G403 is programmed the block change is inhibited as long as the interface signal INTERLOCK LINK ON is present The...

Page 927: ...igurations are as follows they are independent of the position control and input resolutions of the drives Following drive Leading drive Link factor unit Linear axis Linear axis mm mm Linear axis Rotary axis spindle mm deg Rotary axis spindle Linear axis deg mm Rotary axis spindle Rotary axis spindle deg deg The interpolation parameters I and J must be specified in the G function or the input disp...

Page 928: ...e for further information 12 18 12 2 Programming via PLC The gearbox interpolation groupings can be influenced and checked via the interface signals of DB29 following axes and DB31 following spindle ON and OFF commands for the gearbox link can also be issued via the PLC However the PLC cannot be used to change a gearbox link configuration 12 18 12 3 Programming via input display Please refer to th...

Page 929: ...synchronous spindles can be checked only when the link is activated position controllers are then active Set the following NC MDs so that the GI grouping can be configured and programmed during start up NC MD 1844 525 bit1 Reconfiguration permissible NC MD 1844 525 bit2 Switchover of link factor permissible NC MD 1844 525 bit3 Overwriting of synchronous positions permissible Execute a Power On to ...

Page 930: ...ives With setpoint links the leading and following drives must have the same dynamic response rise time 6 Set the required machine data Initial configuration must be enabled 7 Optimize the compensatory controller Switch on link and FD overlay 8 Calculate the time constants of the parallel model Check synchronism error in service display deactivate compensatory controller feedforward control must b...

Page 931: ...synchronous spindles can be checked only when the link is activated position controllers are then active Set the following NC MDs so that the GI grouping can be configured and programmed during start up NC MD 1844 525 bit1 Reconfiguration permissible NC MD 1844 525 bit2 Switchover of link factor permissible NC MD 1844 525 bit3 Overwriting of synchronous positions permissible Execute a Power On to ...

Page 932: ...ives With setpoint links the leading and following drives must have the same dynamic response rise time 6 Set the required machine data Initial configuration must be enabled 7 Optimize the compensatory controller Switch on link and FD overlay 8 Calculate the time constants of the parallel model Check synchronism error in service display deactivate compensatory controller feedforward control must b...

Page 933: ...D 272 Setting the automatic tacho compensation for axes only This setting can be made only if the drift compensation setting is correct Select tacho compensation with NC MD 1804 bit 1 This function is fully automatic i e no further settings need be made The tacho compensation function calculates a direction dependent compensation value at constant traversal of the axis this value can compensate de...

Page 934: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 935: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 936: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 937: ... to set the leading and following drive position control loops such that they both have the same dynamic response to setpoint changes If the P component of the compensatory controller is applied the following drive must have a better dynamic response and therefore a higher maximum servo gain factor FD KVmax than the leading drive Effectively however the same servo gain factor is set for the follow...

Page 938: ...puts on the mixed I O module For this purpose the mixed I O module must be installed in the NC area Please refer to the section headed Drive servo start up for details of how to set the mixed I O module in order to output the analog signal Calculating the time constant for the parallel model To ensure that the compensatory controller operates correctly allowance must be made in the controller for ...

Page 939: ...chronism coarse 1 NC MD 1444 or 492 Emergency retraction threshold 1 Measurements are taken in the following drive resolution If the two synchronism limits are not reached then the associated PLC interface signals are set to 1 When the emergency retraction threshold is exceeded a rapid HW signal is released on the servo level provided the interface signal has enabled the monitoring function The ha...

Page 940: ...ice data for the following drives are shown in the standard displays of the NC axes spindles The following axis service data are identical to those of other NC axes spindles with the exception of the Contour monitoring service display The following applies to the Contour monitoring service display With IS LINK ACTIVE 0 signal i e LINK OFF The current contour deviation for the following axis is dis...

Page 941: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 942: ...s long as the signal INTERLOCK LINK OFF or PLC SPINDLE CONTROL is set The following spindle continues to rotate at the current actual speed after deselection of synchronous operation Operating modes When the link is not activated the following and leading spindles can be traversed in all operating modes When the link is activated the leading spindle can be traversed in the following operating mode...

Page 943: ...gnals are relevant for the leading spindle only the CONTROLLER ENABLE and the extended signals of the following spindle are relevant for the following spindle and the synchronous operation status When the SPINDLE DISABLE signal is applied to the leading spindle then the same signal is set internally for the following spindle Synchronous operation is not aborted if the signal SPINDLE DISABLE is set...

Page 944: ...be corrected or eliminated the workpiece may be strained by torsional forces or the workpiece may be damaged by the chuck The following procedure is recommended Position controller level Dynamic Asymmetry between the control loops involved can be corrected via setpoint filters Static The angular offset which develops for example when the chuck closes causes straining on intervention by the positio...

Page 945: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 946: ...d axis the other axis is referenced afterwards the first axis then operates simultaneously as a coupled axis Finally any dimensional offset is then eliminated by means of the On the fly synchronization function Caution An undesirable feedback loop develops when both GI groupings are active at the same time No check is made for this state This problem can be best avoided by mutually interlocking th...

Page 947: ...tems at the same time for each gantry axis i e an indirect SIPOS absolute system as the 1st measuring system and an incremental direct measuring system as the second After power on the SIPOS systems as the 1st measuring system transmit their absolute values to the control It must be ensured that the NC MD Absolute offset valid 1803 3 is set The absolute positions of the two gantry axes are therefo...

Page 948: ...lowchart for PLC controlled reference point approach Activate control SIPOS measuring systems send their absolute positions to the control Activate GI grouping 1 Enable following axis overlay Initiate on the fly synchronization for grouping 1 Synchronous position reached Deactivate grouping 1 Declare absolute offset NC MD 1808 3 for the leading and following axes to be invalid via FB 62 Select 2nd...

Page 949: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a LD4 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a LD5 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a FD a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a LD1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a LD2 a a a a a a a a a...

Page 950: ...al axis X for the infeed of the cutter to tooth depth the cutter swivel axis A for setting the hobber in relation to the workpiece depending on the cutter and tooth lead angles The machine can also be equipped with further NC axes to obtain an automatic workpiece and tool changer Definition of axes on a hobbing machine example a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Z X a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 951: ...peed ratio between the workpiece table and the cutter and therefore the number of teeth on the workpiece The second summand effects the requisite additional rotation of the C axis for inclined gearing as a function of the axial feed motion of the cutter to produce the tooth pitch The third component also makes allowance for additional rotation of the C axis which compensates the tangential motion ...

Page 952: ...ase refer to previous page for explanation of abbreviations 12 18 16 3 Inclined infeed axes Many users of machines with inclined axes require an NC part program which allows non perpendicular NC axes to be treated in the same way as perpendicular axes for programming purposes Two different systems of co ordinates are therefore provided A non cartesian real co ordinate system of machine axes A cart...

Page 953: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 954: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Result new U value a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Z1 X tan ...

Page 955: ...otes on application For the execution of NC part programs the solution based on GI for compensating the inclined axis can be applied provided that the following points are considered 1 No axis disabling signals may be present for the fictitious axes The latter must be declared as simulated axes via machine data MD 200 or the axis actual values will otherwise be set to zero on reset 2 The real axes...

Page 956: ...ion and compensation with tables IKA Scope of functions SW 3 Interpolation and compensation with tables 2 IKA stage 2 Scope of functions SW 4 which are available as separate options Compensation of errors with TC and IKA The control system may fail to sense the actual value correctly as a result for example of the following influences Temperature thermal expansion Effects of mechanical action betw...

Page 957: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 958: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Input quantity B a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 959: ...verride zero can be applied to all axes in the mode group only via the leading axis or via the channel If the axis programmed as the input quantity loses its reference point e g due to parking axis then the output quantity is not frozen but reduced to zero Limit switch monitoring When IKA TC is active the effective machine position of the output quantity axis is always evaluated when limit switch ...

Page 960: ... a a a a a a a a a a a PNC a a a a a a a a a a a a P1 Compensation value Path distance to go IKA TC motion in negative direction SW limit switch monitoring prior to traversal knows only PNC and therefore outputs alarm 2065 Programmed position beyond SW limit switch even though machine position PM belonging to this NC setpoint is located in front of the SW limit switch With IKA Stage 2 the time whe...

Page 961: ...anges that occur as a result of temperature leadscrew error and beam sag compensation are in the range 0 01 to 0 2 mm An IKA warning limit has been provided to ensure that excessive IKA movements are not caused unintentionally by incorrect inputs protected by password When this limit is violated the PLC can decide which measures should be taken The velocity must be as high as possible in order to ...

Page 962: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 963: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Approximated error line a a a a a a a a a a a a ß a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a P0 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a KTC a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Px a a a a a a a a a a a a 0 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a KTCabs Please note the following definitions KTC Tempe...

Page 964: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a High a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a High a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Activation flags a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Bit U a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 965: ...nits MS in KF format machine reference system value range 1 073 741 823 The values KTCabs tan ß and P0 can be entered as the result of a floating point calculation followed by a fixed point format conversion 12 19 4 4 Activation of function TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION option must be available Transmission of applicable compensation values via command channel to the NC cyclically or as a function of t...

Page 966: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 967: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 968: ...ore reserve a number of IKA configurations for machine compensation purposes the others are then available to the user as workpiece defining and tool dependent IKA configurations A table containing a sequence of curve points is assigned to each IKA configuration A com pensatory additional value of the output quantity can be entered against every interpolation point value of the input quantity The ...

Page 969: ...produce the actual control curve IKA3 This data area represents the sum of all the used and unused compensation points The data area range can be defined via the flexible memory configuration The maximum configuration consists of 65 535 value pairs each of which consists of the position of the input quantity and the associated value of the output quantity 12 19 5 3 Data access The data areas IKA1 ...

Page 970: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 971: ...0000 N0050 40c K7 K10 K270000 N0055 40c K7 K11 K300000 N0060 40c K7 K12 K330000 N0065 40c K7 K13 K360000 N0070 40c K8 K1 K0 output quantities 1 13 N0075 40c K8 K2 K5000 Sine 0 Sine 360 degrees N0080 40c K8 K3 K8660 in units of 10 4 N0085 40c K8 K4 K10000 SIN 1 10000 10 mm N0090 40c K8 K5 K8660 N0095 40c K8 K6 K5000 N0100 40c K8 K7 K0 N0105 40c K8 K8 K 5000 N0110 40c K8 K9 K 8660 N0115 40c K8 K10 K...

Page 972: ...2 K500000 Maximum traversing range 500 mm N0190 40c K32 K2 K 500000 N0195 40c K34 K2 K2000 Modification limitation 2000 units IPO cycle with IPO cycle of 16 ms 7500 mm min Weighting I O N0200 40c K18 K2 K5 Weighting input 5 7 N0205 40c K19 K2 K7 N0210 40c K4 K2 K16 Weighting output 16 3000 N0215 40c K30 K2 K3000 note scaling factor R20 R20 1000 produces 16 3 Modulo function and shift N0220 40c K16...

Page 973: ...ad current point number n R31 100 K300 N0284 M00 error 4 T55 4 Gradient 1 N0285 30c R31 K56 K1 Read current point number n R31 7 End N0300 M02 IKA status displays in T55 and T66 Code Text Significance 2 Running Calculation running 1 Requested Calculation requested 0 Calculated Curve calculated 1 0 pointer Start or end pointer is equal to zero 2 Start End Start pointer is greater than stop pointer ...

Page 974: ...tion has been installed via the machine data Note You will find a detailed description of the G functions listed above in the Programming Guide for SINUMERIK 840C Data access via MMC data transfer The IKA data are divided between 3 data files IKA1 IKA2 IKA3 These data can be read from and written to the hard disk via the RS 232 C V 24 interface Data transfer VRS 232 C workpiece NCK can be made aut...

Page 975: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 976: ...ulated by the control automatically From SW4 the individual curves can also be selected and calculated by operating the softkey IKA curves From IKA Stage 2 individual curves can be selected and calculated in the part program with parameter 55 Notes If an error occurs the control outputs an alarm which does not however cause a processing stop An error scan must be implemented by the user see exampl...

Page 977: ...32 11 partly with G410 G412 partly with G400 G402 G403 PLC Bit1 IKA direction dependent 1 to 32 12 Bit2 IKA negative direction 1 to 32 13 Bit3 IKA with comp actual values up to SW 3 1 to 32 14 Bit4 Exp IKA fct 1 to 32 40 G411 G401 x Bit5 Position dep activation dir dep 1 to 32 41 G412 G402 x Bit6 Position dep activation overt neg 1 to 32 42 G412 G402 x Bit 7 Interpolation cubic 1 to 32 43 x Number...

Page 978: ...tual input B 1 to 32 27 x Actual output value 1 to 32 35 x Interpolat point no 1 to 32 36 x Actual switching state 1 to 32 37 x IKA1 IKA configuration Type definition of data type 37 Internal condition of IKA Final conditions of IKA 0 IKA deactivated 1 IKA deactivated 2 IKA deactivated in plus direction 3 IKA deactivated in minus direction Intermediate conditions of IKA during transition to a new ...

Page 979: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 980: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 981: ...d actual value up to SW 3 Data type 14 Format 1 bit Bit 3 0 IKA configuration uses the uncompensated actual value Bit 3 1 IKA configuration uses the compensated actual value Correct input value SW 3 only The following effect of the IKA value must be considered It is explained here using the example of an axis A compensation additional value IKA value calculated by a control curve here a positive o...

Page 982: ...nterpolation points The cubic interpolation method therefore affords a reduction in data a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 983: ...999 This is used to implement an offset on the compensation curve on input quantity A a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Input A a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Output See also Weighting of inputs depending on input and output types Programming with a G function is only possible with G403 in CGI This offset value ...

Page 984: ... is automatically preset with G function G411 G401 Display in the machine data dialog is in plaintext Output number Data type 3 Depending on the type of output quantity either the axis R parameter or channel no is active Output type Data type 33 The axis type consists of the parameter group and the parameter value For a more detailed explanation see for example Programming Guide for SINUMERIK 840C...

Page 985: ... a a a a a a IKA configuration IKA1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a IKA curves IKA2 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a IKA points IKA3 1 KP 2 KP 3 KP 4 KP 5 KP...

Page 986: ...job list 12 19 5 10 Compensation beyond the working area If the compensation position of an IKA axis lies beyond the working area i e the minimum of working area limitation or SW limit switch the axis is stopped even if the set position still lies within the working area This axis stop may in some cases lead to free grinding in the workpiece The functional supplement has been created to ensure a u...

Page 987: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 988: ...tion and the reactions in the form of stop and retraction can be parameterized via machine data NC and drive controlled via the PLC and or programmed by means of G commands Both sources and reactions can be internal and or external 12 20 2 Parameterization control and programming The Extended stop and retract function comprises 1 Parameterization of the operating characteristics via machine data G...

Page 989: ...rive MD 1633 If the voltage exceeds this limit value the drive switches from generator mode back to normal operation DC link voltage threshold drive MD 1634 If the voltage drops below this limit emergency retraction measures can be initiated according to user specifications via MD or programming Generator speed threshold drive MD 1635 If the speed drops below this value emergency retraction measur...

Page 990: ...on as open loop control function G425 Configure retraction as autonomous drive function G426 12 20 3 Monitoring sources error detection Internal sources Examples of important internal errors are ZK1 messages of 611D drive such as open cable power section failure etc NCK alarms such as CPU failure watchdog emergency retraction threshold mode group stop alarms etc PLC alarms such as CPU failure EMER...

Page 991: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a DC link voltage 600V a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 625 V a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 992: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 993: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Drive MD 1633 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a n_GEN a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Drive MD 1632 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 994: ...message Generator speed drive MD 1635 is output Analogous to the detection of violation of the DC link minimum voltage value set in drive MD 1634 this signal can also be defined as an internal error source for Extended stop and retract See DC link undervoltage monitoring in 611D 12 20 5 3 Communications control failure With the 611D package 2 a communications control failure is detected when the N...

Page 995: ...parameterized via MD T1 Within time T1 1 All leading axes spindles and all axes spindles which are explicitly requested by means of programming but are not leading axes or spindles as well as axes which interpolate with the leading axes spindles specified above and all axes which interpolate with axes spindles explicitly requested through programming instructions are controlled as an interpolative...

Page 996: ...D 5022 bit 1 extended stopping and via a source related machine data NC MD 529 592 channel specific or axis specific autonomous drive ESR The following reaction can be programmed The speed setpoint currently active when the error occurs continues to be output for time T1 diagram parameterizable programmable stop operation as open loop control function The purpose of this is to maintain the motion ...

Page 997: ...5 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Axis spindle specific sources a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 998: ... not in a channel specific MD byte NC MD 920 External sources via HW inputs A retraction process can be initiated from and external source provided input is active by means of a mode group specific input byte of the mixed I O or CSB can be defined by means of MD Activation of input bits An MD byte NC MD 922 is assigned to each channel this byte is used to define which input bits are active and whi...

Page 999: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Interrupted traversing motion a a a a a a a a v a a a a a a a a t a a a a a a a a v a a a a a a a a a a t a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 1000: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 1001: ...the motor measuring system is only known if it is used as the position measuring system The retraction path for the drive is set through the SERVO level with the following geometry neutral data Speed setpoint Travel time deceleration time for braking The drive system traverses the programmed retraction path with an internal time controlled set speed The actual retraction path travelled in the even...

Page 1002: ...ly 24 V DC operator panel available as of 2nd quarter 1995 Software components System software SW 4 2 Generator operation option Emergency retraction option includes regenerative operation The following points must be noted for configuration 1 The electronics of the drive controls must be powered from the DC link With the infeed regenerative feedback modules the connection with the DC link must be...

Page 1003: ...account The maximum possible capacitance load limit consists of the sum of the capacitances of the infeed regenerative feedback module and the axis spindle modules plus additional external capacitors provided by the customer The minimum capacitance shown in the table takes account of a component tolerance of 20 worst case Infeed regen erative feedback unit power Pmax kW Max possible capacitance Cm...

Page 1004: ...enerative stopping From the 5th IPO cycle onward the set speeds of the configured stopping or retraction axes spindles are changed Make sure that the general control machine data Time for interpolation controlled continuation NC MD 324 is set to 0 Otherwise this time must be included additively This is only useful if the cutting conditions must be kept as constant as possible as long as the positi...

Page 1005: ...ltage controller see Start up Guide Section 12 The axis spindle parameterized as the generator measures the DC link voltage in ms cycles The DC link can therefore be backed up within a maximum of 2 ms The energy stored in the drive E 1 2 2 with total mass moment of inertia of the drive angular velocity at the time of switchover to regenerative operation is fed back with a degree of efficiency of a...

Page 1006: ...n case of PLC failure NC MD Bit No 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5022 4 1 Clearing for activation of the autonomous drive emergency retraction in case of PLC failure 5022 5 1 Clearing for activation of the autonomous drive emergency retraction in case of 5 V undervoltage 5022 7 1 Delay of the NC ready signal for 1 IPO cycle in case of PLC failure of 5 V undervoltage 5022 7 0 No delay of the NC ready signal for ...

Page 1007: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 1008: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 1009: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 1010: ...ive 0 Cam range negative Cam range positive Cam position positive cam Cam position negative cam Positive cam negative cam 2nd NC axis 1st NC axis Machine zero 1 Npositive 0 1 Nnegative 0 Cam range negative Cam range positive Cam position negative cam Cam position positive cam Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 AA50 12 235 SINUMERIK 840C IA ...

Page 1011: ...ositions do not exceed the maximum traversing range In axis follow up mode the actual positions are used as cam signals The setpoint is used in the case of position controlled axes The cam values can be entered in the setting data display Position measuring signals or written and read by means of a function The cam positions can be read in the PLC program and changed from the PLC program by means ...

Page 1012: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Bit 8 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 1013: ...air can be only ever be assigned to one NC axis at a time Several pairs of cams can be activated for one axis Cam signals are not output until the axes have been referenced Cams must not be activated until axes have been referenced Output of cam signals The cam signals are transferred in the IPO cycle to the axis specific interface DB32 DW121 m bits 8 to 15 12 238 Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserv...

Page 1014: ... DL 237 Cam 4 Cam 4 Cam 3 Cam 3 Cam 2 Cam 2 Cam 1 Cam 1 Axis30 DR 237 Signals from axis 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 The user can also output the cam signals in the IPO cycle via a digital output byte of the MIXED I O The cam signals are assigned to a MIXED I O output byte via NC MD 311 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 1015: ...ting of the ZOs G54 G57 and the active TO D number 1 D819 after M02 M30 is meaningful only in an actual value system for workpieces 12 23 2 Reference systems It is possible to select between a machine related and a workpiece related actual value display for grinding processes In the machine related actual value system no account is taken of any ZOs or TOs in the dis play of axis actual values The ...

Page 1016: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a 250 P a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a W2 12 23 3 Functional description The Actual value system for workpiece function can be parameterized via setting and machine data The function is activated with SD 5001 bit 0 1 The actual value system for workpiece function has the following features The basic setting of the valid ZOs G54 G57 and TOs D0 819 after power on are ...

Page 1017: ...ne G17 X abscissa and Y ordinate has been selected in the 1st channel to define the reference for tool offsets during machining NC MD5480 0000 address name X abscissa NC MD5500 0001 address name Y ordinate NC MD5520 0010 address name Z co ordinate the plane names of the co ordinate system are assigned to the axes listed above in the 1st channel Zero offset G54 coarse G54 fine G55 coarse G55 fine G...

Page 1018: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 1019: ... reached state can be detected by two different methods depending on the setting in NC MD 1804 3 Sensor signal PLC for travel to fixed stop NC MD 1804 3 1 External sensor sends Fixed stop reached signal to NC via the PLC NC MD 1804 3 0 The Fixed stop reached state is established when the following error has exceeded the value set in NC MD 1280 Following error threshold for travel to fixed stop Onc...

Page 1020: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 1021: ... a P a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Actua tor 20 Functional sequence with analog drives The NC detects selection of function G221 via G function or command channel during block processing and informs the PLC that the function has been selected via the interface signal TRAVEL TO FIXED STOP ACTIVE The PLC must then activate the curre...

Page 1022: ...or SIMODRIVE 660 With these systems a torque limitation is entered in a free gear stage in the actuator When the function is selected the PLC activates the free gear stage thus making the torque limitation operative Setpoints must be input via terminals 56 14 Hardware connections 611A MSD 660 NC PLC Outputs Input Sensor signal for Fixed stop reached optional E5 Torque controlled operation E1 C axi...

Page 1023: ...o the PLC The PLC then activates terminal E5 of the actuator thus effecting a switchover from speed controlled to torque controlled operation After a time period of 80 ms the PLC switches off the torque limitation by selecting the preceding gear stage In addition the PLC also sends an edge signal ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FIXED STOP REACHED to the NC The NC subsequently deletes the remaining distance to go ...

Page 1024: ...osition at the programmed velocity As soon as the axis reaches the fixed stop the following error increases As a result of the increase in the following error above the threshold set in NC MD 1280 or owing to the input signal of a sensor which is passed on to the PLC NC interface the control detects that the fixed stop has been reached The NC setpoint interface then begins to output the current se...

Page 1025: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Po 39 1st torque limitation 1 2 8 Functional sequence The control must switch the spindle to C axis operation before the function is selected It does this by activating terminal E1 C axis operation of the drive actuator The NC detects selection of function G221 via G function or command channel during block processing and informs the PLC t...

Page 1026: ...n accordance with the specified torque SD 320 A block change is then performed The current setpoint and thus also the clamping torque remain applied 12 24 6 Deselection of the function The NC detects that the function has been deselected on the basis of G220 and inputs a 0 current setpoint i e it no longer specifies a clamping torque It resets the interface signals TRAVEL TO FIXED STOP ACTIVE and ...

Page 1027: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Curr setpoint clamping torque a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Progr a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a acc to term 96 G221 select block 1 NFAFAKT VIL PLC PLCOUT 96 PLC drive QFAFAKT VIL PLC FANSCHLAG Servo PLC NFFESTANER VIL PLC Speed setpoint VIL Servo PLCOUT_22 current contr operation QFFESTANER...

Page 1028: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Target position G221 select block 1 NFAFAKT VIL PLC PLCOUT 96 QFAFAKT FANSCHLAG NFFESTANER Speed setpoint PLCOUT_22 QFFESTANER Distance to go Speed controlled operation Block change Current setpoint VIL Servo Current setpoint DAC VRED_FFA 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 AA50 12 253...

Page 1029: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Path in deselection block optional G220 1 VRED_FFA VIL Servo Current setpoint VIL Servo Current setpoint DAC NFAFAKT NFFESTANER Speed controlled operation Axis compensation servo block preparation Speed setpoint Block change PLCOUT_96 PLCOUT_22 QFESTANER 2 6 7 3 8 15 13 14 11 17 12 18 12 254 Siemen...

Page 1030: ...LC output for switchover to current controlled operation This output is connected to term 22 611 9 QFESTANER PLC acknowledgement for interface signal Fixed stop reached 10 Distance to go Initiation of deletion of distance to go 11 Speed controlled operation Separate position control loop and switch the axis internally to follow up mode principle of operation as for spindle mode 12 Block change A b...

Page 1031: ...r current setpoint The axis then approaches the target position at the programmed velocity As soon as the axis has reached the fixed stop the following error increases As a result of the increase in the following error above the threshold set in NC MD 1280 or owing to the input signal of a sensor which is passed on to the PLC NC interface the control detects that the fixed stop has been reached Th...

Page 1032: ...hed a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Block change a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Motor current a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 1033: ...00 Number of axis specific measured values for the Extended measurement function NC MD 60013 Memory for real axes as from SW 5 NC MD 61020 Memory for Extended overstore as from SW 5 to 61025 General The Flexible memory configuration function allows the user to influence the memory page allocation for User data Part program data UMS data IKA data R parameters TO data Data for real axes Data for ext...

Page 1034: ...oded blocks can then be inserted in the processing sequence in the IPO cycle if required 12 25 2 System features boundary conditions Compatibility 1024 KB 1 MB NC module with 4 MB memory or 3072 KB 3 MB with 8 MB memory configuration are available for the data of the UMS IKA part programs and drive and for the measured value data In addition to this storage approximately 40 KB of memory are availa...

Page 1035: ...ry NC data in the TEA1 file NCMEMCFG The data are stored in punch tape format in the same way as for example the standard MDs N60000 64 N61000 23 N62000 0 N60001 176 N61001 23 N62001 0 N60002 4000 N61002 23 N62002 0 N60003 0 N61003 23 N62003 0 N60004 0 N61004 23 N60005 819 N61005 23 N60006 10 N61020 1 N60007 700 N61021 1 N62028 0 N60008 600 N61022 0 N62029 0 N60009 0 to61025 N60010 0 N60011 0 N600...

Page 1036: ...s during the initial start up phase and can be operated If a 386 NC CPU module is replaced by a 486 SX NC CPU module it is advisable to use the same memory configuration in the new module The initial start up procedure is as follows The rotary switch on the CSB module is set to start up position and the control switched on The control reaches cyclic operation within the start up mode The data cont...

Page 1037: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 1038: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 1039: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ncmemcfg a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 1040: ...SW version 4 and higher NC machine data MD 60009 to 60011 are not evaluated by the NC and are used only for display purposes The machine data in the Start up Data directory can be read out as usual via the computer link or V24 or read in to the control When the user reads in the new MD however he must remember that these MD which can also be examined online with the aid of MDD need not necessarily...

Page 1041: ... Longer power up times The available memory is set via NC MD 60016 The drive software memory requirement can be increased from 288 Kbytes to 384 Kbytes for more recent software versions If less memory is made available than is needed for the drive software the missing software is retroloaded from the hard disk thus increasing the time which the control takes to power up No Number of drive packages...

Page 1042: ...ameters these new R parameters can be used in part programs e g X R3000 If the same part program is processed on another control which has a different configuration of the R parameter memory and does not contain this R3000 parameter processing of the part program is interrupted and the alarm General programming error output Block buffer The selected number of block buffers determines the maximum n...

Page 1043: ...ry is enabled via the machine data Memory for real axes MD 60013 which is stored in the ncmemcfg file This file can be edited via the MDD menu tree Machine data NC machine data ETC flex memory conf If the user has defined more real axes than memory is available alarm 71 is displayed The number of axes for which memory is available is indicated ot the SERVO on transmission of the axis independent d...

Page 1044: ...switching edge depends on the rotation of direction of the encoder Position direction of rotation Positive switching edge Negative direction of rotation Negative switching edge The following have been introduced to provide switching hysteresis compensation MD 3096 3124 Zero mark compensation positive axis MD 2416 2433 Zero mark compensation positive spindle and MD 3128 3156 Zero mark compensation ...

Page 1045: ... G functions for thread functions G33 G34 G35 G36 G63 are selected There is no way in which the user can directly initiate the switchover process Gear stages parameter set switchover for axes with 840 C and SW 3 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Part program SERVO parameter...

Page 1046: ...nst with position controller 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 MD PaSe parameter set The switchover is implemented by means of the Actual gear stage control bits in the cyclical spindle specific PLC interface DB 31 DR K 1 bits 0 2 i e the user can directly select the active parameters via the PLC program In addition the user also has an automatic gear stage selection function at his disposal which w...

Page 1047: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Setpoint gear stage a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Actual gear stage NCK parameter set NC...

Page 1048: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 1828 523 bit 0 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 522 bit 4 UND a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a SGS a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a AGS PaGr PCtr actual PaGr R actual PaGr...

Page 1049: ...1164 1168 1172 1176 1180 Time const symm filter 392 1324 1460 1464 1468 1472 1476 1480 Time const setpoint filter 1272 1484 1488 1492 1496 1500 1504 1508 SERVO maximum speed 256 1512 1516 1520 1524 1528 1532 1536 Exact stop limit coarse 204 1540 1544 1548 1552 1556 1560 1564 Exact stop limit fine 208 1568 1572 1576 1580 1584 1588 1592 Zero speed control 212 1596 1600 1604 1608 1612 1616 1620 Elect...

Page 1050: ...me const setp filter K4 link branch 2567 2568 2569 2570 2571 2572 2573 2574 Synchronism coarse 492 2553 2554 2555 2556 2557 2558 2559 Synchronism fine 491 2546 2547 2548 2549 2550 2551 2552 Alarm lim velocity 2522 2523 2524 2525 2526 2527 2528 2529 Alarm lim acceleration 2530 2531 2532 2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 Emerg retract threshold 493 2560 2561 2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 Accel time const w o PCtr...

Page 1051: ... which can be taken into account as with previous software versions by means of pulse path evaluation Spindle 1stPaSe 2ndPaSe 3rdPaSe 4thPaSe 5thPaSe 6thPaSe 7thPaSe 8thPaSe Parameter Number of teeth motor 2400 2401 2402 2403 2404 2405 2406 2407 Number of teeth spindle 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 Zero mark compensation 2416 2417 2418 2419 2430 2431 2432 2433 Zero mark compensation 2434...

Page 1052: ...11D systems The switchover of a parameter set from a certain parameter group can be initiated for example from the part program by means of an auxiliary function This function is detected by the PLC which subsequently passes the parameter set number to the NCK interface and activates it 12 27 3 Switchover Switchover between parameter sets is implemented via the PLC interface Axis Parameter group P...

Page 1053: ... a a a a a n2 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a xg a a a a a a a a a a a a xs a a a a a a a a a a a a xt a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a R a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a R M a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a G The gear ratio specifies the speed ratio between the drive and output ends n1 zs R n2 zm n1 Drive speed n2 Output speed zs Output spindle number of teeth zm Drive spindle number of teeth The ...

Page 1054: ...rol Parameter set ratio Service number 0 01 rev min rev min rev min degrees degrees The current parameter set numbers of the two parameter groups Position control and Ratio are output in the services displays Axis individual and Spindle individual The following applies to spindles When the extended parameter set swithover function and Switch over parameter groups together setting MD 522 bit 4 0 ar...

Page 1055: ...dle then the old functionality prior to SW 4 regarding traversing limits tapping gear stage switchover and drives parameters is applicable The associated MD of the extended parameter sets are not activated The following boundary conditions apply when this function is activated Spindle Software version 4 is compatible with previous versions in terms of spindle gear stage switchover functionality Pa...

Page 1056: ... for activation bits status bits a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 1057: ...All activated data channels become active immediately i e in the next IPO cycle at the latest and simultaneously Each individual high speed data channel is capable of transferring a maximum of one 32 bit value the data length is specific to data group and data type Since the processor is not capable of writing reading 32 bit data to from the link RAM with one single access operation access must be...

Page 1058: ...be configured one after another Contents of DB 3 Data transfer areas A data transfer area is an element of the interface DB 3 which allows certain data to be exchanged between the NC and PLC The type and meaning of the data are defined in the configuration High speed data channels A high speed channel is a certain type of data transfer area its format and processing mode can be specified The lengt...

Page 1059: ...a r e a N C u p d a t i n g r a t e F u n c t i o n i d e n t i f i e r C o n f i g u r i n g p a r a m e t e r 1 L O W C o n f i g u r i n g p a r a m e t e r 1 H I G H C o n f i g u r i n g p a r a m e t e r 2 L O W C o n f i g u r i n g p a r a m e t e r 2 H I G H C o n f i g u r i n g p a r a m e t e r 3 L O W C o n f i g u r i n g p a r a m e t e r 3 H I G H C o n f i g u r i n g p a r a m e ...

Page 1060: ...ed 03H Wrong update rate If a fault occurs the configuration is rejected The corresponding data transfer area is no longer processed by the NC until there is a reconfiguration DL 1 Job number Since the configuration for a number of data transfer areas is defined via one channel only and consecutively for the areas concerned there is no longer any assignment between the currently supplied data and ...

Page 1061: ...C A c t i v a t i o n b i t s f r o m P L C A c t i v a t i o n b i t s f r o m P L C S t a t u s b i t s f r o m NC D a t a c h a n n e l c o n f i g u r a t i o n v a l i d S t a t u s b i t s f r o m NC D a t a c h a n n e l c o n f i g u r a t i o n v a l i d S t a t u s b i t s f r o m NC D a t a c h a n n e l c o n f i g u r a t i o n v a l i d S t a t u s b i t s f r o m NC D a t a c h a n ...

Page 1062: ...R x 2 Control bits Error in NC data write operation Error in NC data read operation Synchronous data channel New value for NCK data write New value for NCK data read Error in NC data write read operation Set by NC if it has not been possible to read write a value Possible causes Permissible value range exceeded Drive not ready New value for NC data read Indicates that the date value has been newly...

Page 1063: ...nnel is then no longer controlled via the data channel specific bits New values read NC data and New values write NC data DB3 DRx bit 0 and bit1 but via the synchronous data channel bits New values read NC data and New values write NC data DB3 DR12 bit 0 and bit 1 As all the synchronous data channels are controlled by these bits all data channels are activated simultaneously With a synchronous Rea...

Page 1064: ...or the NC even though the data channel is operating without acknowledgement The NC reads data only if new data have been entered in order to eliminate unnecessary link RAM access operations by the NCK operating time Case 3 Read with acknowledgement configure high speed data channel cyclical from now on If New value for NC data read is set read value reset New value for NC data read Case 4 Read wit...

Page 1065: ...ber 02 Digital I O in NCK 32 0 Data designation 0 0 03 SW 5 and higher NCK data 32 0 Signal number Axis No Channel IKA No Explanation of drive data Function identifier Explanation Max permissible number Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 01 Drive data 32 Data group 21H Data type Signal number Axis spindle number Data group 21H Data type 0 7 parameter set number Signal number 0 19999 p...

Page 1066: ...ta group 21H Data type Signal number Axis spindle number Data group 26H Data type 0 Signal number 0 1000 possible inputs see table below Axis spindle drive number Addressing types Axis spindle number 100H 127H Axis 100H 127H Axis 0 39 0 29 possible 128H 131H Spindle 40 49 40 45 possible spindle 1 6 Signal number Meaning Data format 1 Unit Attribute AXIS SPINDLE Read 1 Following error SL UMS Read 2...

Page 1067: ...ead 202 Speed actual value SL 0 1 RPM Read Explanation of digital I O in NCK Function identifier Explanation Max permissible number Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 01 Digital I O in NCK 32 Data group 21H Data type Signal number Axis spindle number The digital I O peripherals e g 6 digital inputs of Central Service Board or maximum 2 mixed I O modules with 2 input and output bytes e...

Page 1068: ...g power up The high speed data channels do not remain active after mains on off since the data in the NC are stored in the dynamic RAM In addition the NC internal pointers must be re calculated after every power up since for example changes to internal address lists may have occurred as a result of the cancellation of axes by means of a power ON operation The PLC user program must re configure the...

Page 1069: ...pensation value 1 30 LR 8 IKA intermediate point number type 35 9 IKA table input A type 22 10 Axis setpoint 1 30 LR 11 Number of predecoded blocks 12 CPU use Configuration in PLC DB 2 is performed with the function identifier 03 and configuration parameter 1 0 This reading process can be executed either with or without acknowledgement Operation with acknowledgement means the next value is read on...

Page 1070: ...ter 3 HIGH Axis No DL 6 0x03 Configuration parameter 4 LOW Channel IKA No DR 6 0x00 Configuration parameter 4 HIGH Channel IKA No Writing these signals from the PLC is not permitted If an attempt is made to perform a write access the error code 41 Configuration parameter 2 incorrect is indicated in DB 2 DR 0 Examples for Servo Trace or high speed data channel The following abbreviations are used M...

Page 1071: ... e RW 999 mm min Distance to go on path Formula for servo trace RW MW EF mm Formula for high speed data channel RW MW EF 2 mm IKA input quantity value A Important The IKA No selected in the servo trace screen must be larger by 1 than the desired IKA No applies for SW 5 1 and 5 2 If the input quantity is a position the following applies Formula for servo trace RW MW EF mm Formula for high speed dat...

Page 1072: ...la for servo trace RW MW Dimension as indicated Formula for high speed data channel RW MW LF mm Current compensation point SINUMERIK 840C T M Formula for servo trace RW MW Formula for high speed data channel RW MW 2 The output compensation point is the smaller one of the two including the current position IKA table input A Formula for servo trace RW MW LF mm Formula for high speed data channel RW ...

Page 1073: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 1074: ...s Axis programming can be carried out directly or indirectly Example X1 Y1 Z1 C1 C2 Measuring axes are the specified axes 441 No Measuring axis is the axis specified by a global axis MS Start parameter The start parameter is the R parameter as from which measuring data are stored for the respective axis At least one start parameter has to be specified With multiple measuring axes and one start par...

Page 1075: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 1076: ...tion controller cycle the measured value is read from the measuring circuit belonging to the last edge When programming the measuring edge switch S4 on the CSB module must be taken into account Depending on switch S4 this module can invert the signal of the probe PCA measuring circuit successor to SPC214 6FX1121 4BA03 Only one measuring probe can be active The PCA measuring circuit can react in th...

Page 1077: ... SPC HMS SIMODRIVE 611D SPC HMS SPC HMS PCA SPC HMS Measuring circuit switchover Any attempt to switch over the active measuring system switchover of first second measuring system by PLC signal DB 32 DL k 2 bit while measurement is in progress likewise leads to abortion of the G720 G721 block with output of a RESET alarm Reactions to disturbances errors relating to Extended measurement Through eva...

Page 1078: ...ion edge selection etc is not supported by the measuring circuit hardware the axis specific RESET alarm 1076 Hardware measurement is output The following steps can be taken to avoid this problem When taking measurements with the second probe MT 2 program PCA and or 611D axes only In mixed operation 611D PCA with SPC HMS program first probe input MT 1 and negative edge MF 1 only Alarm 1076 is also ...

Page 1079: ... MD 2702 NC MD 2703 NC MD 2704 General notes Master slave operation is required for the following applications to which different principles apply For power gain In this case two or more drives are securely coupled to an output shaft mechanically e g to the main machining spindle This application is defined when a machine is planned and cannot be changed during operation or only with difficulty Ma...

Page 1080: ...in the following diagram the speed setpoint Nset of the master is output directly to the slave For clarity s sake only one slave is shown If there are several slave drives they all receive the speed setpoint of the master Cascading where a master in speed setpoint coupling is itself a slave is not permissible Any existing position control of the slaves is automatically deactivated When the speed s...

Page 1081: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Torque com pensation control slave a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Vr Tr a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 1082: ...on according to the moments of inertia of the motors is recommended with the aim of achieving the same ramp up time for both drives The standard parameterization of 500 results in a distribution according to values in drive machine data 1725 normalization of the torque setpoint interface for both axes For another distribution the MD 1344 2702 must be calculated according to the following formula M...

Page 1083: ...ve operation by the PLC signal is ignored The request is ignored and the status bit Slave operation active is not set In the opposite case the same procedure is followed i e the mode master slave first selected is retained A function generator start is rejected A request to travel to fixed stop and a mode change of the slave to reciprocation or position mode causes alarm 1056 and 2086 A mode chang...

Page 1084: ...ust be set to 0 The global MD 156 only applies if the axial MD 1224 is 0 and must therefore be set to 0 In this case the servo enables of the drive are cancelled immediately To prevent the drive performing regenerative braking the drive machine data 1404 must be set to 0 The axis then coasts to rest If active braking is only to begin after a certain delay with the torque of the still intact slaves...

Page 1085: ...Normal functionality without ESR 2 ESR not active axes are FA and MD 1812 bit 3 1 3 a ESR active axes are not FA or MD 1812 bit 3 0 3 b ESR active axes are FA and MD 1812 bit 3 1 Master Immediate initiation of follow up with parameterized stopping times Transition to controlled follow up Immediate initiation of follow up with parameterized stopping times Transition to controlled follow up Slave Im...

Page 1086: ...on interpolatory compensation with absolute values This actual value is still corrected but not used for control Backlash compensation corrects the actual value in accordance with the setpoint from the NCK and is therefore automatically inactive Depending on the traverse motion of the master the actual position is therefore incorrect by the amount of the backlash After the backlash compensation ha...

Page 1087: ... path speed of the channels in the mode group such that the following axis travels only a short distance past the switch The axis grouping is not separated 12 31 2 Description of function Sequence The SW limit switches for following axes are monitored only if MD 560 bit 1 1 Dyn SW limit switches for following axes MD 560 bit 5 1 Software limit switches active Axis is referenced Axis is following a...

Page 1088: ...ty value Vperm calculated from the distance to the SW limit switch and the max acceleration value Amax a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 2 d Amax a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Vperm A ...

Page 1089: ...es it possible to limit the distance traversed by the axis passed the SW limit switch 1 corresponds to 100 The following start up procedure is recommended Set Min reduction factor to 1 Traverse following axis at max speed with monitoring of SW limit switch active If the distance by which the axis traverses past the SW limit switch is too large then the reduction factor must be decreased Retraction...

Page 1090: ...d as cuboids Starting from a machine reference point M for stationary of F for moving protection zones the protection zone reference point P1 is defined The protection zone coordinate system with its coordinates X Y and Z which is parallel with the axes of the machine coordinate system is in the protection zone reference point P1 The dimensions of the protection zone must be specified as sections ...

Page 1091: ...876 Protection zone exists Because of the specific machine geometry it might be necessary to model the geometric space that a machine part requiring protection occupies more precisely than is possible with a single protection zone To achieve a better approximation of the protection zone to the geometry of the machine part it is possible to define several protection zones that describe the machine ...

Page 1092: ...ne coordinate systems within a machine tool the two coordinate systems must be transformed into a common coordinate system monitoring coordinate system The common coordinate system can be any machine coordinate system Collision monitoring only works with the machine coordinate systems that are not rotated with respect to one another but only translated and or mirrored Each protection zone must the...

Page 1093: ...l the coordinates in which the tool offset value is not equal Adapting the protection zone to the active tool with tool offset allowance a a Y X a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a P1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 1094: ...d the protection zone number must be programmed immediately after the G function The G function is modal so that changes in the D number are automatically calculated To achieve collision monitoring without any delay in protection zone adaptation to the tool offset values all relevant data must be specified in the part program block on tool change Example N100 T tool location No D tool No G180 prot...

Page 1095: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Reduction zone a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Max braking distance in X a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 1096: ...ation of the reduction factor of the protection zone S1 with respect to a second protection zone S2 Re dfacS1 SS1S2 Sbrake_maxS1 Sbrake_maxS2 100 with SS1S2 distance between the two protection zones S1 and S2 Minimum reduction factor If two protection zones collide the result is a reduction of 0 This would prevent retraction from this situation The axis specific machine data Minimum reduction fact...

Page 1097: ...protection zone distance of zero it is possible that the two protection zones might overlap as the result of a collision The overlap is larger the larger the IPO sampling time the larger the maximum velocity the larger the maximum reduction factor the smaller the acceleration the smaller the maximum jerk It is therefore advisable not to fit the protection zones exactly round the machine parts to b...

Page 1098: ...he velocity resulting from the set velocity and the minimum reduction factor The collision of protection zones is displayed for each protection zone in the PLC interface DB48 Axis specific alarms Protection zone collision plus Alarm 1368 Protection zone collision minus Alarm 1372 PLC interface Protection zone collision DB48 DW5 and DW7 bit 0 bit 15 12 32 13 Deselection of collision of monitoring o...

Page 1099: ...a a a a a a a a 340 a a a a a a a a a a a a 60 a a a a a a a a F a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Diameter 330 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 50 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 325 Slide 1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a SR2 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a SR3 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 340...

Page 1100: ...rotection zone data BITS Protection zone exists SR exist MD 38760 0 1 Monitoring reference OFF SR 1 8 MD 38800 0 7 00000000 SR 9 16 MD 38840 0 7 00000000 SR 17 20 MD 38880 0 7 00000000 SR 21 32 MD 38920 0 7 00000000 Protection zone 2 Slide 1 Protection zone data VALUES Motion axes X coordinate MD 38001 X1 Y coordinate MD 38041 0 Z coordinate MD 38081 Z1 FP1 vector X coordinate MD 38121 113 Y coord...

Page 1101: ...ordinate MD 38002 X1 Y coordinate MD 38042 0 Z coordinate MD 38082 Z1 FP1 vector X coordinate MD 38122 32 Y coordinate MD 38162 0 Z coordinate MD 38202 332 Dimension vector X coordinate MD 38242 64 Y coordinate MD 38282 0 Z coordinate MD 38322 334 Machine coordinate system Number MD 38402 1 Protection zone data BITS Protection zone exists SR exist MD 38762 0 1 Monitoring reference OFF SR 1 8 MD 38...

Page 1102: ...tion zone data BITS Protection zone exists SR exist MD 38763 0 1 Monitoring reference OFF SR 1 8 MD 38803 0 7 00010000 SR 9 16 MD 38843 0 7 00000000 SR 17 20 MD 38883 0 7 00000000 SR 21 32 MD 38923 0 7 00000000 Protection zone 5 Turret of slide 2 Protection zone data VALUES Motion axes X coordinate MD 38004 X2 Y coordinate MD 38044 Z coordinate MD 38084 Z2 FP1 vector X coordinate MD 38124 32 Y coo...

Page 1103: ...00000000 Machine coordinate system Machine coord systems VALUES Offset vector 2nd machine coordinate system X coordinate MD 337 0 Y coordinate MD 338 0 Z coordinate MD 339 0 Machine coord systems BITS Mirroring vector 2nd mach coord system X Y Z MD5026 0 2 001 Axis specific data Coord assignment of mach data 1st axis MD 39480 Abscissa 2nd axis MD 39481 Applicate 3rd axis MD 39482 Abscissa 4th axis...

Page 1104: ...tection zone can be written with 411 12 32 15 2 Collision monitoring without reduction zone The implemented safety concept will influence the entire mode group of the motion axes of the two protection zones by way of reduction factor of the collision monitoring on the approach to these two protection zones If two protection zones are positioned next to one another in such a way that their distance...

Page 1105: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 1106: ...ameterizing such filters We would recommend our drive system training courses to those interested in understanding the full range of possible applications for setpoint filters on mechanically critical machines Note The sequence of operations for this function is described in Sections 9 1 and 9 2 in this documentation General application criteria Filters are used to smooth the response curve to dam...

Page 1107: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Speed actual value monitoring torque setpoint limitation 0 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 1108: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 611D Weight compensation feedforward control torque a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a n set a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 1109: ...a a a a a a a a a a a Udq a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a URST a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a n act a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a iq set a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Filter 1 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 1110: ...e phase angles as the frequency increases If the phase angle exceeds I180 I the graph representation is reversed i e it jumps from 180 to180 or from 180 to 180 12 33 1 2 Measurement range bandwidth measurement time The bandwidth is calculated as follows on the SINUMERIK 840C 611D 1 Max bandwidth 2 x speed controller clock cycle The bandwidths are as follows depending on the speed controller clock ...

Page 1111: ...red at higher traversing speeds Very high amplitude values falsify the measurement results or may result in damage to mechanical components If you obtain very noisy results you should increase the number of averaging operations or the amplitude The accuracy increases in proportion to the selected number of averaging operations 12 33 2 Optimization of speed controller The following rules apply to o...

Page 1112: ...oller The proportional gain is optimized as the first step in optimizing the speed controller For this purpose MD 1409 Reset time speed controller is set to 500 ms effectively deactivating the integral action component The proportional component is then incremented until resonance points in the system are reached motor begins to whistle The P gain which is determined by this method must then be mu...

Page 1113: ...Determine points of resonance according to No of resonance points Individual pronounced resonance points Resonance bundles Position of resonance points Fundamental frequency range Controller stability limit Frequency range above controller stability limit Properties Distribution of resonance dependent on traversing speed or direction Mechanical resonance or excessively high controller settings Ref...

Page 1114: ...point filter 1 MD 1213 Counter bandwidth current setpint filter 2 MD 1214 Bandwidth current setpoint filter 2 MD 1215 Blocking frequency current setpoint filter 2 MD 1216 Counter bandwidth current setpint filter 3 MD 1217 Bandwidth current setpoint filter 3 MD 1218 Blocking frequency current setpoint filter 3 MD 1219 Counter bandwidth current setpint filter 4 MD 1220 Bandwidth current setpoint fil...

Page 1115: ...lter Low pass filters must be dimensioned such that resonance is kept reliably low while the filter effect on the fundamental frequency range is minimized Filter in the case of resonance in the fundamental frequency range Resonance in the fundamental frequency range can normally be restricted by means of control parameters Note Smoothing filters have a negative phase rotation low pass generally ba...

Page 1116: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 10 3 0 3 10 20 30 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Phase response a a a a...

Page 1117: ...ce resonance in the fundamental frequency range A bandstop is used when a narrow pointed peak exceeds the 0 dB line in the amplitude response at a fixed frequency above the fundamental frequency range of the speed controller This causes a clearly audible whistling noise in the drive train Depending on requirements the bandstop can be set in two configurations Simple bandstop with Blocking frequenc...

Page 1118: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Phase response a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Phase angle a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a log f Hz a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 102 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 103 ...

Page 1119: ...a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Phase angle a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a log f Hz a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 102 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 103 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 1120: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Phase response a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Phase angle a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a log f Hz a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 1121: ... as a guide value for the bandwidth to be entered Filter 2 MD 1213 2 900 Hz 2 450 Hz MD 1214 Bandwidth current setpoint filter 1 450 Hz Filter 2 MD 1216 2 1200 Hz 2 600 Hz MD 1217 Bandwidth current setpoint filter 2 600 Hz Enter counter bandwidth Filter 2 MD 1215 Counter bandwidth current setpoint filter 1 0 0 default Filter 3 MD 1218 Counter bandwidth current setpoint filter 2 0 0 default After t...

Page 1122: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a...

Page 1123: ...d setpoint filter MD 1502 Time constant speed setpoint filter 1 MD 1503 Time constant speed setpoint filter 2 MD 1506 Natural frequency speed setpoint filter 1 MD 1507 Damping speed setpoint filter 1 MD 1508 Natural frequency speed setpoint filter 2 MD 1509 Damping speed setpoint filter 2 MD 1514 Blocking frequency speed setpoint filter 1 MD 1515 Bandwidth speed setpoint filter 1 MD 1516 Bandwidth...

Page 1124: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 62 5 µs 125 0 µs a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a MD 1514 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ...

Page 1125: ...nt dynamic responses in the speed control loops of individual axes The total equivalent time constant equivalent time constant of speed control loop equivalent time constant of speed setpoint filter must be set such that it is the same for all mutually interpolating axes The input of damping values close the minimum input limit causes overshoots in the time range up to a factor of 2 This effect is...

Page 1126: ... a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a 10 3 0 3 10 20 30 a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Phase response a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Phase angle a a a a a a a a ...

Page 1127: ...m If bit 3 or 4 is set on an axis then the following restrictions apply to that measuring system 12 34 3 Restrictions Principal axis No functional restrictions Actual value passive monitoring axis Referencing in process measuring extended measuring and EnDat absolute encoder are not permitted Remedy for actual value passive monitoring axis Referencing is achieved by setting a reference dimension s...

Page 1128: ...0 0 4th axis Monitoring axis MD 18323 4 1 2nd measuring system released for monitoring MD 18323 2 1 no absolute encoder MD 18083 0 0 Example 2 EnDat absolute encoder The 2nd measuring system of the 3rd axis monitors the measuring circuit of the 1st measuring system of the 2nd axis There an EnDat absolute encoder is connected 2nd axis Principal axis monitored axis MD 18321 3 0 1st measuring system ...

Page 1129: ...cess to the hard disk The danger in such cases is that the MMC may not be able to boot at the next POWER ON With the help of a standard UPS approx 300 W it is possible to switch off or ramp down express shutdown the NC in a controlled manner Express shutdown function diagram UPS signals Power failure Input X 121 5 6 UPS CSB I O NCK MD 5030 Bit 0 bit 7 MMC PLC basic program Bit 6 Bit 7 FY 22 PLC us...

Page 1130: ...S The Data saved signal can be applied to the CSB output plug X 121 as floating contact assembly on pin 5 and pin 6 Connection of UPS via CSB Prerequisite for this functionality is a CSB module with order number 6FC5 114 0AA02 0AA2 On earlier releases of the CSB module alarm 3113 Error by access to mixed I O or CSB was activated when a bit was set simultaneous in the NC MD 5030 The UPS message sig...

Page 1131: ...the Win OEM documentation Take note of the fact that contrary to the description the low and the high byte are to be swapped on the I code and the control flag 4 OEM information bit FX74 OEM EMPF The PLC MD 137 is monitored for a valid input only by the system 25 254 Permitted are according to the Win OEM documentation FX74 FW 25 198 If another FW is entered e g 220 there will be no error message ...

Page 1132: ...be entered here DWNR No of 1st DW of user data blocks Format KF Variable assignment FW244 QTTG Acknowledgement of FX Format KF Indication of 1st FY a total of 3 bytes Variable assignment FW246 FX74 DBTY Module type DB DX Format KC Variable assignment FW240 DBNR Module no Format KF Variable assignment FW 242 If the variable is assigned 0 must be entered here DWNR No of the 1st DW of user data block...

Page 1133: ...NR KF 255 DWNR KF 10 QTTG KF 192 Scanning of the OEM information bit PLC MD 137 Only once bit 0 or 1 has been set then data acknowledgement are present in the mailbox In this dependency the FX74 is called up BA FX74 OEM EMPF DBTY KC DB DBNR KF 255 DWNR KF 20 OEMN KF 0 QTTG KF 195 Data received as acknowledgement Express shutdown implemented the I code is returned DB 255 DW20 KH 0004 Package length...

Page 1134: ...nversion can be configured by the user Manual readjustment of the calculated data is possible No password is required for the switchover A password is required for the conversion since the machine data dialog MDD must be started 12 36 3 System data When switching over the measuring system all measurements in length will automatically be converted into the new measuring system This includes Zero of...

Page 1135: ...ted when the user presses the softkey OK 1 The converted data files the names of which are listed in the configuration file CONFIG are sent to the NCK via data transfer 2 After a successfully completed loading process the services send the I code as task to the NCK which then converts the TOA and ZOA data according to a specified calculation method The conversion can be controlled via a parameter ...

Page 1136: ...s for Diagnosis Machine data File functions Fig Conversion function in the MDD Pay attention to the following during the conversion process Select a data block with the data selector from the user branch Only offline data can be used other data are rejected by an error message If there are no offline data linked first save online data in a file of their own Rounding errors may occur through multip...

Page 1137: ...e The target file again contains the complete data A target file is created for each zone 4 The machine data to be converted can be configured by the user according to a list 5 Automatic identification of the conversion direction inch to metric or vice versa is carried out via the reference date MD can be configured Rejection of the process results if data are not complete Therefore only complete ...

Page 1138: ...e configuration file is interpreted during conversion and switchover while the list of descriptions is only necessary during conversion A syntax test is carried out in the list of descriptions and incurring errors are signalled to the user interface The following is an example of an error that can incur when in TEA1 the entry n for general machine data has been omitted The log file shows the error...

Page 1139: ...ration file CONFIG and a common list of descriptions file LIST for all groups TEA1 TEA2 TEA4 The selection of the configuration file and the list of descriptions is carried out via the softkeys Diagnosis PC data Conversion data Fig Configuration file CONFIG The line FILES is written by the internal conversion routine i e the name of the source file and the name of the target file are recorded ther...

Page 1140: ...imal digit e g 3840 2 is not possible The bit specification must follow the number without blank space MODES X Y 1 per mode Definition of the code letters for the modes In the form of code letters capital letters are exactly one character long and separated by commas Presently at least 2 at maximum 2 modes possible The calculation is also defined here from X Y By reversing the conversion direction...

Page 1141: ...ed The line with the code word FILES is also written Here the source name and the target name from the MDD are stored TOA_ZOA X Y This parameter is transmitted directly to the NCK in I code Here parameter means 0 Do not carry out conversion on the NCK side 1 Metric conversion of TOA and ZOA data on the NCK side 2 Inch conversion of TOA and ZOA data on the NCK side Default setting M 1 I 2 The follo...

Page 1142: ...e mentioned types of data are permissible and valid for conversion At least one section has to be quoted with a machine data The sequence of the sections is immaterial Comments can be added to the file introduced by a double slash then the rest of the line is ignored right to the end of the line By entering space lines the list can be structured Blank spaces are also possible There are basically t...

Page 1143: ...ile to the target file Special treatment of machine data In general in the case of axis specific and channel specific machine data only the specific base number has to be quoted since the internal loop automatically increases the respective number for the data This will lead to the state that conversion is valid for all data However this is not always wanted under certain circumstances A remedial ...

Page 1144: ...FXP4 format Then data have to be converted using factor 25 4 or 1 25 4 with the following conversion into the original FLP10 format This may lead to rounding errors which will become greater if more conversions are carried out Overflows when converting Overflows can incur when converting data e g work area limitation 9 999 9999 inch 253 999 974 mm Input limit is 99 999 999 mm Alarm is given and th...

Page 1145: ...ring the conversion process NC start disable feed stop and spindle stop Upward compatibility It must be ensured that new or enlarged setting data machine data etc can be included for conversion purposes Checking for conversions not carried out Checks must be carried out by the user whether a metric program runs on a metric machine starting cycle Graphic simulation There is no checking of the consi...

Page 1146: ...tchover 12 27 Reference point approach 10 4 4 Rotary axis 12 2 Endlessly rotating 12 3 Simultaneous axes 12 21 Axis converter 12 17 2 Programming 12 17 2 2 Axis specific resolutions 10 2 B BACKUP 4 6 BEDCONF 4 4 3 BERO 10 3 BERO interface 12 26 C C axis operation 12 7 2 4 Clamping torque Fixed 12 24 4 Programmable 12 24 5 Color definition tables 4 4 4 Color mapping lists 4 4 5 Color settings 4 4 6...

Page 1147: ...cading 12 18 6 Cycles 4 4 7 Cycles machine data 6 13 Cycles machine data dialog as from SW 3 5 5 D Data channels high speed 12 28 Configuration 12 28 3 Data blocks 12 28 4 Use 12 28 6 Data backup 11 Diagnoses MMC area 4 PLC 3 5 Distance coded reference marks 10 4 5 Drift compensation 10 4 2 Drive configuration machine data dialog 5 4 Drive machine data machine data dialog 5 4 Drive optimization 10...

Page 1148: ...0 DC link overvoltage limitation 12 20 4 2 DC link undervoltage monitoring 12 20 4 4 Mains buffering 12 20 4 3 Mains failure detection 12 20 4 1 Retraction 12 20 7 as autonomous drive function 12 20 7 2 as open loop control function 12 20 7 1 Stop 12 20 6 as autonomous drive function 12 20 6 2 as open loop control function 12 20 6 1 Extension of in process measurement 12 29 General hardware condit...

Page 1149: ... 3 2 2 Flowchart up to SW 2 2 10 PLC 3 Timeout analysis 3 5 5 Spindle 10 5 Open loop control mode 10 5 1 Oscillation mode 10 5 2 Positioning mode 10 5 3 Standard start up 2 Installation checklist 1 4 Interpolation and compensation with tables IKA 12 19 5 L Leadscrew error compensation LEC 12 1 Link 12 18 4 3 Actual position link 12 18 4 3 Actual value link 12 18 4 2 Setpoint link 12 18 4 1 Setpoin...

Page 1150: ... error 12 30 5 Switch on off 12 30 4 Measurement extension in process 12 29 2 General hardware conditions 12 29 2 Memory configuration flexible 12 25 Start up of the control 12 25 4 MMC area Diagnosis 4 Color definition tables 4 4 4 Color mapping lists 4 4 5 Color settings 4 4 6 Configuration file 4 4 3 Cycles 4 4 7 NC service 4 2 Password 4 1 1 PC data 4 4 N NC machine data 5 2 2 Configuring MDD ...

Page 1151: ... PLC machine data 8 PLC machine data machine data dialog 5 3 2 Printing screen hardcopies 4 1 3 Programming Axis converter 12 17 2 2 Coordinate transformation 12 6 7 Curve gearbox interpolation 12 18 12 Spindle converter 12 17 3 2 Q Quadrant error compensation QEC 12 16 Neural QEC 9 5 4 Parameterization 12 16 2 Standard QEC 9 5 3 Start up 12 16 3 R Reference point approach 10 4 4 Retraction 12 20 ...

Page 1152: ... 2 4 Open loop control mode 12 7 2 1 Oscillation mode 12 7 2 2 Positioning mode 12 7 2 3 Stopping 12 20 6 Switchover measuring system 1 or 2 12 15 T Tacho compensation 10 4 1 2 Temperature compensation TC 12 19 4 Test Functional test 1 5 Voltage test 1 5 Thread cutting Following error compensation 12 8 Multiple thread 12 8 1 Position controlled spindle 12 9 Timeout analysis 3 5 5 Travel to fixed s...

Page 1153: ...or improve ment are also welcome Installation Guide Order No 6FC5197 6AA50 0BP2 Edition 09 2001 Suggestions Corrections For Publication Manual SINUMERIK 840C SIMODRIVE 611 D Installation Instructions Service Documentation Siemens AG A S MC BMS P O Box 31 80 D 91050 Erlangen Federal Republic of Germany Tel 49 180 5050 222 Hotline Fax 49 9131 98 2176 email motioncontrol docu erlf siemens de ...

Page 1154: ...ntation SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 840C SINUMERIK Interface Signals Connection Conditions SINUMERIK WS 800A CL 800 Cycle Language User s Guide SINUMERIK Function Block Packages Function Macros SINUMERIK Planning Guide Graphic Programming System User s Guide OEM Version for Windows SINUMERIK PLC 135 WB WB2d WD Quick Reference Planning S5 HLL 840 840C 880 880 GA2 840C 840C 840C 840 840C 880 880 GA2 SINUMER...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for SIMODRIVE 611-D

Starck Mobile USB 3.0

Brand: LaCie Pages: 2

Brand: LaCie Pages: 2

Rugged Thunderbolt

Brand: LaCie Pages: 4

Rugged All-Terrain

Brand: LaCie Pages: 37

LaCinema Classic HD

Brand: LaCie Pages: 81

Brand: LaCie Pages: 4

Hard Disk MAX Quadra

Brand: LaCie Pages: 2

8BIG RACK THUNDERBOLT 2

Brand: LaCie Pages: 28

Brand: U-Line Pages: 6

HazMat station EPO-2

Brand: Denios Pages: 6

Cloud Object Storage System Slicestor 2212...

Brand: IBM Pages: 50

B. spaces Tidy Toybox

Brand: Maison Battat Pages: 2

Brand: Eminent Pages: 112

ST9160310AS - Momentus 5400.5 160 GB Hard Drive

Brand: Seagate Pages: 2

TotalStorageFAStT900

Brand: IBM Pages: 112

AltaVault System

Brand: NetApp Pages: 2

Brand: Dot Hill Systems Pages: 134

CFexpress CFX-B Series

Brand: Wise Pages: 8

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands